PGIM Setup Admin

Power Generation Information Manager
Version 5
Installation/Administration
TRADEMARKS
MODBUS is a registered Trademark of Gould Electronics
ORACLE ® is a registered Trademark of Oracle Corp. USA
Windows 2000®, Windows XP Windows 2003®, Excel®, SQL-Server ®
are registered
Trademarks of Microsoft Corp. USA
PcAnywhere™ is a registered Trademark of Symantec Corporation
Pentium® is a registered Trademark of Intel Corporation
NOTE
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed, as a commitment by ABB AG. ABB AG assumes no responsibility for any errors
that may appear in this document.
In no event shall ABB AG be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB AG be
liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware
described in this document.
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission of ABB AG, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor
be used for any unauthorized purpose.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used,
copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Copyright ©2000-2006 ABB AG. All rights reserved.

PGIM 5 Contact
Contact: ABB AG
Power Generation Products
www.abb.com/powergeneration
Document: 1KGD 400111
Copying of this document, and giving it to others and the use or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden
without express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the
grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design. (DIN 34)
PGIM 5 Table of Contents
Table of Contents:
1 General ......................................................................................................................................12
1.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................................................12
1.1.1 Process data acquisition (scanner) ....................................................................................................13
1.1.2 Process Data Management (Server)..................................................................................................14
1.1.3 Process Data Evaluation (Clients)......................................................................................................15
1.1.3.1 Navigator ........................................................................................................................................15
1.1.3.2 SignalExplorer ................................................................................................................................15
1.1.3.3 Trend Analysis ................................................................................................................................15
1.1.3.4 Process graphic ..............................................................................................................................16
1.1.3.5 Logging ...........................................................................................................................................16
1.1.3.6 Technical calculations ....................................................................................................................16
1.1.3.7 Security Concept ............................................................................................................................16
1.2 Setup instruction ......................................................................................................................................18
1.2.1 PGIM Installation Kit ...........................................................................................................................18
1.2.2 Licensing.............................................................................................................................................18
1.2.3 Installation...........................................................................................................................................18
1.2.3.1 Requirements for installation ..........................................................................................................18
1.2.3.2 Installation of a component from the PGIM system software.........................................................19
1.2.3.2.1 Installation of a PGIM server or PGIM scanner..............................................................................22
1.2.3.2.2 Installation of a PGIM client............................................................................................................23
1.2.3.2.3 Installation of a demo system .........................................................................................................23
1.2.3.3 Update ............................................................................................................................................24
1.2.3.4 Folder structure...............................................................................................................................24
1.2.3.5 Initialization file PLACO.INI ............................................................................................................25
1.2.3.6 Installation of a component from the PGIM EventManagement.....................................................30
1.3 Security Concept ......................................................................................................................................31
1.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................31
1.3.2 Functionality........................................................................................................................................31
1.4 UserManager .............................................................................................................................................33
1.4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................33
1.4.2 Call-in of the UserManager.................................................................................................................33
1.4.3 Arrangement of the different control elements in the UserManager ..................................................34
1.4.4 UserManager functionality:.................................................................................................................34
1.4.4.1 Display users and user groups.......................................................................................................34
1.4.4.2 Rename user group........................................................................................................................34
1.4.4.3 Add new user..................................................................................................................................34
1.4.4.4 Change password for users ...........................................................................................................35
1.4.4.5 Allocate users to another group .....................................................................................................35
1.4.4.6 Allocate rights for specific signals to specific user groups .............................................................35
1.4.4.7 Allocate application rights to a specific user group ........................................................................35
1.5 Signal Names ............................................................................................................................................37
1.6 Status Information....................................................................................................................................38
1.7 Time Zones................................................................................................................................................39

1.7.1 Function of TimeZone.........................................................................................................................40
1.7.1.1 Time format.....................................................................................................................................40
1.7.1.1.1 FileTime ..........................................................................................................................................40
1.7.1.1.2 Unix-stile time format Double Values (used in PGIM)....................................................................40
1.7.1.1.3 VisualBasic /VB/VBA,etc.)-like Double Values...............................................................................40
1.7.1.2 Converting function.........................................................................................................................40
1.7.1.3 Short TimeZoneTableLoaded(void) :..............................................................................................41
1.7.1.4 Void Initialize (void) :.......................................................................................................................41
1.7.1.5 Double FileTime2UnixDbl (FILETIME *Date) .................................................................................41
1.7.1.6 BiasFlag..........................................................................................................................................41
1KGD 400111 December 2006 iv
1.7.1.7 Return Code ...................................................................................................................................41
1.7.2 Build up of TimeZone.txt.....................................................................................................................42
1.8 Used Ports.................................................................................................................................................43
1.9 Range (double, float)................................................................................................................................44
1.10 Maintenance Interval ................................................................................................................................44
2 Scanner .....................................................................................................................................46
2.1 Introduction...............................................................................................................................................46
2.2 ScanManager ............................................................................................................................................48

2.2.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................48
2.2.2 Settings...............................................................................................................................................48
2.2.3 Zero Point Cut off................................................................................................................................49
2.2.4 Function to suppress leakage flow added. .........................................................................................50
2.3 ScanDriver.................................................................................................................................................52
2.3.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................52
2.4 Virtual ScanDriver.....................................................................................................................................53
2.4.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................53
2.4.2 Installation...........................................................................................................................................53
2.4.2.1 Configuration ..................................................................................................................................53
2.4.2.1.1 Structure of the VSD.INI control file................................................................................................54
2.4.2.1.2 Structure of the signal configuration file KONFI.CSV.....................................................................54
2.5 ABB PGIM System Scandriver ................................................................................................................56
2.5.1 Installation...........................................................................................................................................56
2.5.2 SystemScanner.ini..............................................................................................................................57
2.6 ABB PGIM WatchDog ScanDriver...........................................................................................................58
2.6.1 Installation...........................................................................................................................................58
2.7 ABB Contronic 3.......................................................................................................................................60
2.7.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................60
2.7.1.1 Contronic 3 connection requirements.............................................................................................60
2.7.1.2 Example of a C3 configuration .......................................................................................................61
2.7.1.3 Configuration of the Contronic 3 connection ..................................................................................62
2.8 ABB Conlink (Contronic 3-I, Contronic EK, Contronic P) ....................................................................65
2.8.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................65
2.8.2 Folder structure ConLink connection..................................................................................................65
2.8.2.1 Folder "Konfi_Conlink Scanner" .....................................................................................................65
2.8.2.2 Folder " ConlinkNT " .......................................................................................................................66
2.8.3 Contronic block transfer......................................................................................................................68
2.8.4 Configuration of ConLink connection .................................................................................................69
2.8.4.1 Short configuration procedure for Contronic E and C3I .................................................................69
2.8.4.1.1 Short configuration procedure format.............................................................................................69
2.8.4.1.2 Short configuration procedure description......................................................................................70
2.8.4.1.3 Create short configuration procedure.............................................................................................71
2.8.4.1.4 Transfer short configuration procedure ..........................................................................................71
2.8.4.1.5 Connection run ...............................................................................................................................72
2.8.4.1.6 Contents of the file CONFI.TXT......................................................................................................74
2.8.4.2 Short configuration procedure format Contronic P.........................................................................74
2.8.4.2.1 Short configuration procedure format.............................................................................................74
2.8.4.2.2 Short configuration procedure description......................................................................................75
2.8.4.2.3 Create short configuration procedure.............................................................................................76
2.8.4.2.4 Transfer short configuration procedure ..........................................................................................76
2.8.4.2.5 Connection run ...............................................................................................................................77
1KGD 400111 December 2006 v

2.8.4.2.6 Contents of the file CONFI.TXT......................................................................................................78
2.8.5 ConLink connection with ConVisa configuration data ........................................................................78
2.9 OPC-Client.................................................................................................................................................80
2.9.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................80
2.9.2 Prerequisites.......................................................................................................................................81
2.9.3 Installation OPC-Scanner ...................................................................................................................81
2.9.4 Format of the file OPCScanner.INI.....................................................................................................82
2.9.5 Format konfi.txt ...................................................................................................................................82
2.9.6 Start of the OPC-Scanner...................................................................................................................83
2.9.7 Error Codes ........................................................................................................................................83
2.9.8 OPC-Scanner an Operate IT B...........................................................................................................85
2.9.9 Advant AC400 and Advant AC450 .....................................................................................................90
2.9.10 Installation instructions for PGIM OPC-Scanner to AC800F (formerly Freelance 2000) ...................91
2.9.11 OPC-Scanner on a WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750....................................................................................93
2.9.12 OPC-Scanner on Siemens WinCC.....................................................................................................95
2.9.12.1 OPC Scanner specials for Simens S5/S7 ......................................................................................95
2.10 ABB PROCONTROL P14 (POS30)...........................................................................................................96
2.10.1 Introduction .........................................................................................................................................96
2.10.2 Prerequisites PROCONTROL P.........................................................................................................96
2.10.3 Installation XTC-Scanner....................................................................................................................97
2.10.4 XTCScanner.ini.................................................................................................................................100
2.10.5 Network Configuration at PGIM side ...............................................................................................100
2.10.6 Start of the XTC-Scanners ...............................................................................................................100
2.11 ABB Symphony Maestro-UX .................................................................................................................101
2.11.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................101
2.11.2 Installation on a PGIM PC ................................................................................................................102
2.11.3 Configuration on a PGIM PC ............................................................................................................102
2.11.4 Updating of the Confi.txt configuration file........................................................................................102
2.11.5 Installation on the Maestro-UX workstation......................................................................................104
2.11.5.1 Maestro environment and UNIX ...................................................................................................104
2.11.5.2 Installation of the "NETAPI" software on the Maestro-UX workstation ........................................105
2.12 ABB Symphony PProtocol (Onet, Melody, OperateIT B0/B1) .............................................................110
2.12.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................110
2.12.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................110
2.12.3 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................111
2.12.4 Pconnect.txt configuration file from Maestro UX ..............................................................................111
2.12.5 Pconnect.txt configuration file from OperateIT B0/B1 .......................................................................112
2.12.6 Pprotscanner.ini (Packed Boolean Telegrams)................................................................................112
2.13 ASCII-File.................................................................................................................................................114
2.13.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................114
2.13.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................114
2.13.3 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................114
2.13.4 Structure of the signal configuration file KONFI.CSV.......................................................................115
2.13.5 Structure of the measured value file WERTE.CSV ..........................................................................115
2.14 ASCII Online Scanner.............................................................................................................................118
2.14.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................118
2.14.2 Value file ...........................................................................................................................................118
2.14.3 Signal Configuration .........................................................................................................................119
2.14.3.1 Build up of the signal configuration file KONFI.CSV ....................................................................119
2.14.4 Configuration file ASCIIOnlineScanner.ini........................................................................................119
2.15 Teleperm-XP............................................................................................................................................122
2.15.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................122
2.15.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................122
2.15.3 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................123
2.16 ABB Symphony Harmony (Infi 90) ........................................................................................................127
1KGD 400111 December 2006 vi

2.16.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................127
2.16.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................127
2.16.3 Structure ...........................................................................................................................................128
2.16.4 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................128
2.17 ABB ConDas ...........................................................................................................................................148
2.17.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................148
2.17.2 Shortconfiguration ............................................................................................................................148
2.17.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................................148
2.17.2.2 Creation of Short Documentation .................................................................................................149
2.17.2.3 Structure of Short Documentation ................................................................................................150
2.17.2.3.1 Example of a short configuration procedure.................................................................................151
2.17.3 The GDB File ....................................................................................................................................152
2.17.4 The ConDasScanner.ini Control File................................................................................................153
2.17.5 Log Files ...........................................................................................................................................155
2.18 Intellution FIX ..........................................................................................................................................156
2.18.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................156
2.18.2 The GDB File ....................................................................................................................................156
2.18.3 The FIXScanner.ini Control File .......................................................................................................157
2.18.4 Log Files ...........................................................................................................................................158
2.19 ScanDriver for Mark IV (MarkIVScanner) .............................................................................................158
2.19.1 Data collection ..................................................................................................................................158
2.19.2 MarkIVScanner.ini ............................................................................................................................159
2.19.3 Configuration Files *.txt ....................................................................................................................160
2.19.4 Log files ............................................................................................................................................162
2.20 GSM Protocol for MarkV/VI Scanner ....................................................................................................163
2.20.1 MarkVScanner.ini .............................................................................................................................163
2.20.2 Configuration data for MarkV............................................................................................................164
2.20.3 Configuration data of MarkVI............................................................................................................165
2.20.4 Log files ............................................................................................................................................165
3 OPC-Servers ...........................................................................................................................166
3.1 OPC DA Server on Scan Manager (legacy)..........................................................................................166

3.1.1 Installation.........................................................................................................................................167
3.1.2 Name Box .........................................................................................................................................170
3.2 OPC DA Server on PGIM Database.......................................................................................................171
3.3 Functionality ...........................................................................................................................................172
3.4 Quality Mapping......................................................................................................................................172
3.5 Implemented Interfaces .........................................................................................................................173
3.6 PGIM OPC DA Server Performance Test..............................................................................................176
3.7 OPC HDA Compliance Key ....................................................................................................................176
4 Database / Server ...................................................................................................................177
4.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................177
4.2 Start / Stop...............................................................................................................................................178

4.2.1 Start the server .................................................................................................................................178
4.2.2 Stop the server .................................................................................................................................178
4.2.3 Status monitoring of the server.........................................................................................................178
4.3 Time synchronization between clients and server .............................................................................180
1KGD 400111 December 2006 vii

4.4 Diagnosis.................................................................................................................................................181
4.4.1 Client Connections ...........................................................................................................................183
4.4.2 The 1000 fastest Signals ..................................................................................................................184
4.5 Server Redundance for High Availability.............................................................................................186
4.5.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................186
4.5.2 Function mode ..................................................................................................................................187
4.5.3 Installation (Case 1)..........................................................................................................................188
4.5.3.1 IPSwitch in the Client Network (Redproxy) ..................................................................................189
4.5.3.2 IPSwitch in the Client Network (Redproxy) ..................................................................................189
4.5.4.1 IPSwitch Case 2 ...........................................................................................................................192
4.5.5.1 IPSwitch Case 3 ...........................................................................................................................195
4.5.5.1.1 Installation of the first IPSwitch.....................................................................................................195
4.5.5.1.2 Installation of the second IPSwitch...............................................................................................195
4.6 Handling instructions relating to typical scenarios............................................................................197
4.6.1 New installation of a redundancy system .........................................................................................197
4.6.2 Expansion of an existing server to redundancy ...............................................................................197
4.6.3 One redundancy partner fails ...........................................................................................................197
4.6.4 Both servers fail ................................................................................................................................197
4.6.5 Manual balancing .............................................................................................................................198
4.6.6 Start of only one server without redundancy partner .......................................................................198
4.7 Redundancy Manager ............................................................................................................................199
4.7.1 Possible texts in the detail analysis ..................................................................................................200
4.8 Replace the PGIM Server Hardware (Maintenance) ............................................................................209
4.8.1 Starting Position Single PGIM Server ..............................................................................................209
4.8.2 Update procedure for “hostname stays the same“...........................................................................209
4.8.3 Update procedure for “hostname does change“ ..............................................................................210
5 Logs and Reports...................................................................................................................211
5.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................211
5.2 Installation of the Add-In .......................................................................................................................211
5.3 The folder structure / Files ....................................................................................................................212
5.4 Entries in the Ini-File ..............................................................................................................................213
6 Trend .......................................................................................................................................214
6.1 Signal Colors...........................................................................................................................................214
6.2 Optional Columns in the Legend ..........................................................................................................214
6.3 Context Menu ..........................................................................................................................................215

6.3.1 Some Signals marked at the same Time .........................................................................................216
6.4 NLSTimeFormatID in GED.Settings......................................................................................................217
7 AutoMail ..................................................................................................................................218
7.1 Installation and Configuration...............................................................................................................218
7.2 Manage AutoMail Tasks.........................................................................................................................219
7.3 Task Configuration.................................................................................................................................220
1KGD 400111 December 2006 viii

7.4 E-mail List................................................................................................................................................221
8 WebClient................................................................................................................................223
8.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................223
8.2 Function of WebClients .........................................................................................................................224
8.3 Configuration of WebClient ...................................................................................................................225
8.4 PGIM Server in the Internet ...................................................................................................................226
9 Backup hints...........................................................................................................................227
9.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................227
9.1.1 Requirements and Preparations.......................................................................................................227
9.1.2 Backup Tools ....................................................................................................................................227
9.2 Windows Operating System..................................................................................................................228
9.2.1 Backup..............................................................................................................................................228
9.2.2 Recovery...........................................................................................................................................228
9.3 Office Applications and Other Tools ....................................................................................................229
9.3.1 Backup..............................................................................................................................................229
9.3.2 Recovery...........................................................................................................................................229
9.4 PGIM Server ............................................................................................................................................230
9.4.1 Backup of Basic Installation..............................................................................................................230
9.4.2 Recovery of Basic Installation ..........................................................................................................230
9.4.3 Backup of Continuously Changing Data...........................................................................................230
9.4.4 Recovery of Continuously Changing Data .......................................................................................230
9.4.5 PGIM Folder Structure......................................................................................................................231
9.5 PGIM Scanner .........................................................................................................................................231
9.6 PGIM Client..............................................................................................................................................231
9.7 Event Management .................................................................................................................................231

9.7.1 Backup of Basic Installation..............................................................................................................231
9.7.2 Recovery of Basic Installation ..........................................................................................................231
9.7.3 Backup of Continuously Changing Data...........................................................................................231
9.7.4 Recovery of Continuously Changing Data .......................................................................................232
9.8 Complete Backup and Recovery...........................................................................................................232
9.8.1 Backup..............................................................................................................................................232
9.8.2 Recovery...........................................................................................................................................232
10 Ex/Import-Manager .................................................................................................................233
10.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................233
10.2 Installation...............................................................................................................................................234
10.2.1 Initialization file .................................................................................................................................234
11 AutoUpdate .............................................................................................................................235
11.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................235
11.2 Preconditions..........................................................................................................................................236
11.3 Installation of AutoUpdate.....................................................................................................................237
1KGD 400111 December 2006 ix

11.4 Administration of PGIM AutoUpdate ....................................................................................................238
11.5 AutoUpdate on PGIM Clients.................................................................................................................241
11.6 Files in the Update Folder of the File Server .......................................................................................242
11.7 Sample Installations...............................................................................................................................243

11.7.1 Setup of the FTP server ...................................................................................................................243
11.7.2 Setup of clients .................................................................................................................................244
11.7.2.1 First example ................................................................................................................................244
11.7.2.2 Second example ...........................................................................................................................245
12 PGIM Scheduler ......................................................................................................................247
12.1 Configuration of a scheduler item ........................................................................................................248
12.2 Configuration of additional jobs ...........................................................................................................252
12.3 Options ....................................................................................................................................................253
13 Additional Programs ..............................................................................................................254
13.1 ASCII-Export............................................................................................................................................254
13.1.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................254
13.1.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................254
13.2 External Scheduler (legacy) ..................................................................................................................255
13.2.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................255
13.2.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................255
13.2.2.1 Files required for the installation...................................................................................................255
13.2.2.2 Files required for the access to PGIM ..........................................................................................255
13.2.2.3 Files necessary for the access to the registry ..............................................................................255
13.3 System Router ........................................................................................................................................257
13.3.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................257
13.3.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................257
13.3.3 Structure ...........................................................................................................................................257
13.3.4 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................258
13.3.5 Autostart / Initialization file................................................................................................................258
13.3.6 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................258
13.3.6.1 Module Connect............................................................................................................................259
13.3.6.2 Module DisConnectAlarm.............................................................................................................259
13.3.6.3 Module ODER (OR)......................................................................................................................260
13.3.6.4 Module 2ZU1 (2 to 1)....................................................................................................................261
13.4 AutoMailer ...............................................................................................................................................262
13.4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................262
13.4.2 Installation.........................................................................................................................................262
13.4.3 Structure ...........................................................................................................................................262
13.4.4 Procedure during configuration, start and stop ................................................................................262
13.4.5 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................263
13.4.5.1 Setting Options .............................................................................................................................263
13.4.5.2 Create new folder .........................................................................................................................263
13.4.5.2.1 Set folder ......................................................................................................................................263
13.4.5.2.2 Active ............................................................................................................................................263
13.4.5.2.3 Add e-mail addresses to the folder...............................................................................................263
13.4.5.2.4 Delete e-mail addresses from the folder ......................................................................................263
13.4.5.3 Add, change or delete e-mail addresses in the internal AutoMail database ................................263
13.4.5.3.1 Delete e-mail addresses from the internal AutoMail database ....................................................264
13.4.5.3.2 Edit e-mail addresses in the internal AutoMail database .............................................................264
13.4.5.3.3 Add e-mail addresses to the internal AutoMail database.............................................................264
1KGD 400111 December 2006 x

13.4.5.4 Set properties of folder .................................................................................................................264
13.4.5.5 Quit AutoMail ................................................................................................................................264
13.4.5.6 Remarks .......................................................................................................................................264
13.4.6 Error analysis....................................................................................................................................264
13.4.6.1 Options .........................................................................................................................................264
13.4.6.2 Log file ..........................................................................................................................................265
13.5 System Diagnosis...................................................................................................................................265
13.5.1 General .............................................................................................................................................265
13.5.2 Icons .................................................................................................................................................265
13.5.3 Handling............................................................................................................................................265
13.5.4 Main Items ........................................................................................................................................266
13.5.4.1 ScanManager ...............................................................................................................................266
13.5.4.2 Server ...........................................................................................................................................268
13.5.4.3 Client.............................................................................................................................................269
13.5.4.4 Info ................................................................................................................................................270
13.5.5 Create Report ...................................................................................................................................270
13.5.6 Restrictions with Windows 95/98......................................................................................................271
13.5.7 Log file "DrPlantCon.log" ..................................................................................................................271
13.6 WatchDog ................................................................................................................................................272
13.6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................272
13.6.2 Procedure .........................................................................................................................................272
13.6.2.1 Control System Setup...................................................................................................................272
13.6.2.2 PGIM Setup ..................................................................................................................................272
13.6.3 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................273
13.6.4 PlaCoWD Dialog Box .......................................................................................................................275
13.7 PlaCoArc (Symphony Maestro-UX).......................................................................................................277
13.7.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................277
13.7.2 Installation on the Maestro-UX workstation......................................................................................278
13.7.2.1 Detailed description of software installation .................................................................................281
13.7.2.1.1 Customize the "/etc/services" file on the Maestro-UX WS ...........................................................281
13.7.2.1.2 Installation of the "Mux2PlaCo" software on the Maestro-UX WS ...............................................283
13.7.2.1.3 Copy "OPL_APPL_TASK*" for integration into the APIM process...............................................283
13.7.2.1.4 Customize the "/NETAPI/netapistart" ...........................................................................................284
13.7.3 Installation of the PlaCoArc on the PGIM PC...................................................................................286
13.8 Auto RAS Dialer ......................................................................................................................................287
13.8.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................287
13.8.2 Conditions.........................................................................................................................................287
13.8.3 Installation.........................................................................................................................................287
13.8.4 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................287
13.8.5 Operation ..........................................................................................................................................289
1KGD 400111 December 2006 xi

PGIM 5
1 General
Power Generation Information Manager (PGIM) is the new name for the former known Plant
Information Management Software "PlantConnect". This document and also the PGIM Software
version 4.0 use both names.
1.1 Introduction
For the specific tasks of plant management, a Process Information Management System (PIMS) is
both the basis and also the tool to acquire and centrally evaluate all process data using one system
with one user interface.
Office
network
SQL
Counters interface
Alarm and event Trends and +

Real-time Relational
management data History data process graphics
base base
Logs and Performance

accounting calculation
Process
communication
Figure 1: Functional scope of PGIM

PGIM is a PIMS which is completely operable under Windows 2000™/ Windows XP™/ Windows
2003™. It takes advantage of the experience gained from the preceding systems, for example
ConDas and ConVisa. Using the latest development tools and currently available system
environments (fast PCs, Win32, proven and well-known standard software), PGIM meets the
requirements of an efficient and plant-wide process information management.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 12

PGIM 5
Figure 2: Overview of the PGIM system structure (example)

The PGIM scanner implements the control system connection, for example to Symphony Maestro,
Freelance 2000, PROCONTROL P, Contronic E-K, Contronic P, Contronic 3 or to control systems of
other manufacturers for example via OPC. Via network connections, process data is transmitted by a
TCP/IP protocol to a PGIM server. All process data can be submitted to a preprocessing procedure,
so that all operators will have access to the same data stock.
Each PGIM server stores the process data in a process database. The process data is transferred by
the scanners based on the changes made to the data. In the process database signal descriptions are
stored along with other important information:
• Real-time and historical values.
• Events with detailed status information from the lower-level systems.
The PGIM clients retrieve the process data from the database. The server as well as the clients
provides extensive functions for an evaluation of process states. Analog, binary and counter values as
well as status signals can be evaluated by one system. With trend analysis screens you can observe
current and historical process states. Process graphics display process data together with results from
calculations.
Laboratory values, such as material data, can be entered manually into the system. With a process
graphic editor, informative plant and/or process graphics are prepared and adapted dynamically. An
integrated import of Windows graphic formats, for example BMP format, is included.
Common interfaces like OLE / SQL are supported by PGIM. Thus, the integration of common software
products, such as Microsoft Excel, is ensured.
The Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows 2003 operating systems are used as the
platform for the PGIM scanners and servers. PC hardware is used as the hardware platform. The
PGIM clients are operable under Microsoft Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows 2003.
For a cost-saving implementation of PC-based small systems, it is possible to operate PGIM server,
scanner and client on the same computer. Due to the modular structure, the system can be adapted
individually to customer requirements.
1.1.1 Process data acquisition (scanner)

Scanners to acquire data from a number of different distributed control systems. In addition, scanners
can be customized to implement any new systems.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 13

PGIM 5
For the Symphony distributed control system, the network uses TCP/IP protocol to an operator
workstation Symphony Maestro-UX, and to the O-net system bus.
For the PROCONTROL P distributed control system, the network uses TCP/IP protocol to a
POS30 workstation, and it uses the XTC protocol.
For the Symphony Harmony (Infi 90) distributed control system the semAPI is used.
Contronic E-K, Contronic 3I or Contronic P systems are connected via serial interfaces with the
Conlink protocol.
With Contronic 3 systems connection is possible via the cubicle bus to the MZ03, XU03/04,
XU13/14 and SL04/05 bus-capable modules.
An OPC Client allows you to connect to foreign distributed control systems if they support OPC
Server (for example Freelance 2000, Sattline, Siemens S5, Siemens S7, Siemens Teleperm M,...).
An ASCII-ScanDriver allows for a cyclic data import, for example for connection older process
computers.
For the Teleperm XP distributed control system from Siemens the network uses TCP/IP protocol to
the Siemens gateway TXP/XU.
In addition to this on-line data transfer, manual inputs into the system (for example for laboratory data)
are also possible.
The scanners permit a preprocessing of process data. Based on the incoming values, it is possible to
derive events (messages) or to sum quantities using limit value checks. Counters can be implemented
which will integrate, for instance, the operating hours or determine a switching frequency. This occurs
when the status of binary values change. This preprocessing can be extended at any time by linking
with DLL modules (Dynamic Link Library).
1.1.2 Process Data Management (Server)

PGIM includes a process data server to store:
• Signal descriptions.
• Current process data (real-time data).
• Historical process data (long-term storage).
• Messages (events).
Process data includes these stored values:
• The time of acquisition.
• The physical value.
• Detailed status information (for example measured value disturbed).
This data is retrieved from the lower-level distributed control systems and generated in PGIM. The
process data server is the central element of PGIM, from which all the other functions obtain their
data. It provides a high degree of safety and processing speed.
Data can be compressed for long-term storage using, for example:
• Average value.
• Minimum value.
• Maximum value.
• Last value.
• Tolerance band methods.
The tolerance band procedure is the default method of compression.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 14

PGIM 5
With interface functions (API), the databases can be opened for read and write access from software
applications. Common interfaces (such as OLE, SQL) ensure compatibility with the usual office
environment, and common Microsoft-Office products.
1.1.3 Process Data Evaluation (Clients)

Networked computer systems are required for the management of process data on process data
servers. They are also required for the distribution of data to the respective technical departments.
Commercial PC’s can be used as client workstations for data evaluation, operation and configuration.
The interconnected client-server structure minimizes the data flow in the network. Various specialized
clients (software applications) provide fast and individual services for the specific tasks of plant
management.
1.1.3.1 Navigator
The PGIM navigator manages logs, technical calculations, process graphics and trend analyses using
a familiar Windows tree-structure display. The structure can be changed and adapted individually to
create the optimum working environment for each staff member.
1.1.3.2 SignalExplorer
The SignalExplorer retrieves all configured process data from the connected servers. This data can be
filtered and sorted according to codes. Using drag-and-drop operations the signals are controlled by
the clients, i.e. the process data is connected with the client.
1.1.3.3 Trend Analysis

With Trend Analysis you can examine current and historical process data on a screen. You can easily
select and enlarge the time domain to be examined.
The values, points of time and time domains of an arbitrary number of curves can be measured in one
picture. To obtain a better overview you can flood the curves differently, assign different colors and
displace them in the X- and Y-direction. Via the legend for the trend analysis, the representation can
be faded in or out.
An associated control panel allows the selection of the time domains to be examined.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 15

PGIM 5
1.1.3.4 Process graphic

The Process Graphics allow you to clearly display process data together with the results of
calculations. It is also possible to enter calculation parameters and laboratory values manually into the
system, for example material data. Process graphics are customized to fit to the requirements of the
different users. They can be displayed or modified with a user-friendly graphic editor.
1.1.3.5 Logging
Current and historical process data is summarized in a log, and can be printed or saved. The logs are
automatically activated, either in a pre-determined cycle, or by events. Operator intervention is also
possible. Microsoft Excel is used as the front-end software.
Logs are based on templates:
Daily, weekly, monthly and yearly logs.
Accounting logs.
Maintenance logs.
Matrix logs.
The logging process fills in the templates with process data, processes them if necessary, and makes
the logs available for printing or storage as files.
The names and the description of the process data can be accessed through menus. This simplifies
the configuration of signal-connection and layout.
The integration of logging under Microsoft Excel opens log data to Office applications. Logs that have
been generated and stored can processed whenever necessary.
1.1.3.6 Technical calculations

Calculations can be created with algorithms that use current or historical process or test data.
Calculations can either be performed once, or they can be continually executed in a cycle. Standard
libraries (for example water-steam table) can be used for complex thermodynamic calculations.
Compared to logging, the technical calculations provide extended functions such as calculation
modules and methods of calculation.
The configuration takes place in a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. You can select a calculation module
from a range of options.
The inputs and outputs of the calculation module can be linked with the process data or with
constants. The Signal Explorer allows you to assign signals via drag-and-drop operations to the
spreadsheet.
A menu-driven system leads you through the configuration of your technical calculation.
The calculations can be done with Excel or with the Calculation Server.
1.1.3.7 Security Concept

In PGIM you can configure individual applications or signals with different rights to provide the
following functionalities:
Data security.
Data integrity.
Different hierarchy levels.
Different responsibilities.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 16

PGIM 5
The "UserManager" manages PGIM user rights. With it administrators (SysAdmin) can establish new
users or user groups, assign passwords and allocate the different rights to individual user groups or to
signals.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 17

PGIM 5
1.2 Setup instruction
1.2.1 PGIM Installation Kit

The components in the PGIM-Software Installation Kit are as follows:
PGIM CD with PGIM Basis Software including EventManagement.
A software protection module (Dongle). This is included with the installation kit. If it is not,
contact your software supplier. In special cases the licensing can also be done via the network
card of the computer on which PGIM is installed.
A license file "LCFG.INI". This is included with a floppy disc. If it is not, contact your software
supplier. In special cases the license file can be sent by e-mail or the content of the license file can
be sent by fax.
Note: If the PGIM Server and Scanner are installed on different computers a dongle and a license file
are needed for both computers.
1.2.2 Licensing
The CD contains the entire PGIM software package. You are limited in portions of the package you
can use, based on the software protection module in the license file.
Monitoring the licensed scope of use is performed by the PGIM server. If your installation uses one
PGIM server, this server will also be the license server. If you installation uses several PGIM servers
(multi-server environment), you must determine which PGIM server to use as a license server.
1.2.3 Installation
1.2.3.1 Requirements for installation

To install a PGIM server or a PGIM scanner, make sure you have the required operating system:
• Windows 2000 including Service Pack 4.
• Windows XP Service Pack 2 or Windows 2003 Server.
Because TCP/IP communication is used between the different PGIM components (in the network as
well as on a PC) this protocol must be installed on the PGIM system. Contact your system
administrator for help with installing TCP/IP.
The following requirements must also be met before you can start the setup:
For the installation of a PGIM server or scanner, you require:
o License file "LCFG.INI".
o Dongle.
For a PGIM client installation, you must know the TCP/IP name of the PGIM server and the name
of the PGIM license server.
For the Technical Calculations and Logs modules Microsoft Excel 2000, XP or 2003 (at least SP2)
and Internet Explorer 6 or higher is required. Always apply latest service pack if not advised to do
other.
When installing a component from the PGIM EventManagement, follow the instructions in the
separate configuration.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 18

PGIM 5
1.2.3.2 Installation of a component from the PGIM system software

Read the preceding chapters regarding installation before installing components.
Windows login: Log in as a user with administrator rights.
After inserting the CD, the installation procedure should start automatically. You can also
execute the AUTORUN.EXE program from the CD.
The following sequence must be performed:

1. Install PGIM.
2. Reboot if necessary.
3. Install the service pack for PGIM.
5. Install EventManagement (if licensed).
7. Install the service pack for EventManagement.
The PGIM Welcome window of the installation program opens.
Automatic installation needs a configuration file, which can be obtained from an ABB
representative for your system. This option is only applicable for PGIM in 800xA cpntrol system
installations. Please refer to the PGIM 800xA Installation Manual.
Choose “Install PGIM Server and Client 5.0”.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 19

PGIM 5
The next screen will show the status of a small system check if your computer hardware
complies with the PGIM minimum requirements. Please solve all problems before you continue
your installation.
Touch the “Start” button
On the next screen you will find the PGIM Installation Welcome page.
Please press “Next” to continue

On the next screen you can choose the installation path which will be used by the system.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 20

PGIM 5
The standard folder is "C:\PGIM"
If you have already installed PGIM on this computer and are only re-installing a component now,
the target folder is recognized by the setup, and a reinstallation will be performed in the same
target folder.
Note: You can not perform a second installation in another folder. If you require another
installation path, you must remove then reinstall PGIM.
Click Next. The window for the selection of components appears. Now select the required
components.
Select those components which you would like to install. Client and Server come without an
extra option menu.
Scanner selection: Activate [D] Scanner and select one or several ScanDrivers via the
Details... button. Click ENTER after the detail selection in order to return to the Select
components window.
Selection of tools: Activate [D] Tools and select one or several PGIM tools via the
Details... button. Click ENTER after the detail selection in order to return to the Select
components window.
After having selected all the components, click Next.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 21

PGIM 5
This screen will give you the possibility to choose whether the system will be contructed
redundant or not. After selection press Next
All necessary files will be copied. This can take a few minutes. After that, some final
questions must be answered.
When the installation is complete and all software is loaded then hit Finish on this screen.
Update from OPC DA Server:
When upgrading a PGIM system from a prior version, which is using the OPC DA server, you
will see a message on your screen asking whether to upgrade to the never and improved
version of the OPC DA server. This is recommended but be aware that you will have to change
your OPC client assignments as well since the new OPC server does have a new GUID.
1.2.3.2.1 Installation of a PGIM server or PGIM scanner

Characteristic features regarding the installation of a server or scanner: After you have
selected a PGIM server or scanner, you will be requested to select the folder where your license
file resides. (Usually the file "LCFG.INI" on a disk, see notes on the scope of delivery)
If this is an initial installation of the server or a scanner on this computer, select the corresponding
folder and click OK.
If you do not yet have a license file, you may click Skip.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 22

PGIM 5
You can manually add the file LCFG.INI later on. To do this, copy the file into the folder <PGIM-
TargetPath>\PlantConnect.bin\CFG and stop and start the Windows services "PGIM Server" and
"PGIM ScanManager" once.
If you do not manually add an LCFG.INI, you will only have a demo system where the scanner
does not start. The server will start, however, with the limitation to one client and 10 signals.
Dongle: Now take the supplied dongle and put it onto the printer port LPT1 or LPT2 of the
computer. If you have a USB dongle please place it in any USB port of your system. During this
operation the dongle must not be removed!
PGIM data path: This is the main path where PGIM saves the complete data for all the signals
(values and configurations). Select any path name. Only make sure that an NTFS drive is used,
and that long file names are permitted.
After you have entered all this information, PGIM is installed on your computer.
Restart your system. In the case of a server or scanner installation, you should log in again as an
administrator and check in the Windows service manager (under the Control panel) whether the
services "PGIM ScanManager" and "PGIM Server" have the status "Started" and if "Automatic"
has been entered as the kind of start.
After the initial installation of a server, you must activate the PGIM User Manager and define the
users. The User Manager expects that you have logged in with the name "Administrator". Then the
password "PlantConnect" is expected (see PGIM UserManager).
Refer to PGIM Scanner, for commissioning the individual scanners.
1.2.3.2.2 Installation of a PGIM client

Characteristic features regarding the installation of a client: At the initial installation of a client,
you will be requested to give the following details:
Navigator path: This is the folder where your personal PGIM configurations (trend displays, logs,
calculations, etc.) are stored. Select any path name. Only take care that long file names are permitted.
License server: Enter the TCP/IP name of the PGIM server. In a multi-server environment, select the
relevant PGIM server for your area, which is defined by your system designer.
After you have entered this information, PGIM is installed on your computer.
1.2.3.2.3 Installation of a demo system
1KGD 400111 December 2006 23

PGIM 5
The installation of a demo system is done in the same way a PGIM-Server or PGIM-Scanner is
installed. The only difference is that for a demo system no project specific license file is available. A
standard license file is used.
If the installation is run with the default license file 10 signals are allowed in the PGIM ScanManager
as well as in the PGIM server. The default license file is automatically used if no license file is
specified. The default license file is not related to a special network address of a certain computer. A
dongle is not necessary.
1.2.3.3 Update
If this is not a new installation, i.e. if there is already a previous version of PGIM on your computer,
observe the following items before you continue with the installation:
If a PGIM Server and/or a PGIM ScanManager (see Control panel / Services) has been installed on
your computer, stop these services.
Backup the folders:
.. PlantConnect
.. PlantConnect.bin
.. PlantConnect.sys
If you have added PGIM files after the installation, they will not be deleted when installing PGIM.
The installation is started by executing the autorun.exe file of the installation CD.
1.2.3.4 Folder structure

During the installation, the following folder structure is created:
(This example uses drive C:)
C:\PGIM
Folder for plant-specific applications (graphic charts, curves, logs and calculations). The subfolders of
this folder are displayed in the PGIM navigator.
C:\PGIM\PlantConnect.BIN
Folder for program-specific files of the PGIM software.
C:\PGIM\PlantConnect.SYS
The SYS folder includes different system subfolders.
C:\PGIM\PlantConnect.SYS\Temp
Temporary files are stored here which can all be deleted and will be recreated by the applications (for
example: Data.tmp).
C:\ PGIM\PlantConnect.SYS\Debug
Here further subfolders are created by the applications in which the log files for an error analysis will
be created (for example: \SignalExplorer\SignalExplorer.log).
C:\ PGIM\PlantConnect.SYS\Texte
Here further subfolders are created for the different languages in which the text files (one per
application) will be created (for example: \English\SignalExplorer_dt.csv).
C:\ PGIM\PlantConnect.SYS\SysKonfi
Configuration (ini) files are stored here.
C:\ PGIM\PlantConnect.SYS\Events
1KGD 400111 December 2006 24

PGIM 5
Here the data interchange files between EventScanner and ImportClient are interchanged if PGIM
event management has been installed.
1.2.3.5 Initialization file PLACO.INI

This INI-File is placed in the path "... \PlantConnect.bin\Server\" for the server application and in
"....\PlantConnect.bin\Client\" for the client application. The file PLACO.INI files applies to the
configuration and administration of PGIM.
It includes the following entries:
Section [PlantConnect]
Under this entry you can install the PGIM server and / or the graphic editor.
Server= Æ "Yes" means that PGIM will be used as server.
"No" means that PGIM will be used as client.
GED= Æ "Yes" means that the graphic editor shall be used on this PC.
"No" means that the graphic editor will not be used on this PC.
EventServer= Æ When using PGIM together with the event management, the indicate name of
the computer on which the PGIM event database is stored.
KillNotUsedConnectionsAfterHours = 48 Inactive client connections will be disconnected after X
hours. In the example it is 48 hours.
HDAlertIfLessThanMB = 200 If there is less than XX MB available on the hard disk, the file with
the parameter at "AtHDAlertPassMsgToApp" becomes active. If there is only 50% of the set value
available, the data collection of the Database Server stops
AtHDAlertPassMsgToApp = NetSend.bat In this file you can configure who should be informed
when this situation occurs.
Section [Server.Settings]
Paths for archive data:
The PGIM server archives all signal data (signal values and signal configurations) in the file system of
the computer. Therefore base paths for archive data must be preset here. The export paths designate
the external media to which the data will be transferred when the export time has been reached.
Roh.BasePath Æ Base path for the archives
Each signal in the server has its own RAM-Cache. The default size of a RAM-Cache can be set as
follows. It affects the RAM requirements of the server.
Generally, the following thumb rule applies:
RAM requirements in MB =
15+MaxSignals*RohCacheSize*18/10e6+MaxSignals*MMM.RAMCacheSize*30/10e6
Roh.RAMCacheSize Æ Random-access memory dedicated for raw data
MaxSignals Æ Maximum of signals to be stored in the database
Roh.LifeTimeDays Æ Default lifetime of all raw signals in days. This parameter can be
set individual for each signal in the SignalExplorer.
WEBPort = 8081 Æ TCP/IP-Port for the Web Client communication (optional)
WebClientAutoLogoffAfterMinutes=15 Æ Inactive Web Client connections are disconnected
after X Minutes.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 25

PGIM 5
HDAlertIfLessThanMB entry set, the default is now set to 300 (MBytes)
Section [GED.Settings]
MainPath = C:\PlantConnect Æ Main folder for the navigator. Here the path
.\System\Autostart is created automatically.
AddPath = D:\Office\Data Æ Additional folder for the navigator. Also a network path is possible
Section [SignalExplorer]
XtraTools = Æ The entry at this place allows a user-defined pull-down menu
in the SignalExplorer under Extras.
Section [TREND.ATTRIBUTES]
Signal = _KB_SignalName,140
No = _INDEX,20
Current Value = _KB_VALUE,95
Y-MRB = _KB_MBA,75
Y-MRE = _KB_MBE,75
MRB KKS = mba,75
MRE KKS = mbe,75
Dim = Dimension,70
Description (long text) = Langtext,300
DB Calc function = _KB_DBACCESS,120
Value Transform = _KB_MX_PLUS_B,180
Scanner = ScanMan,85
Driver = ScanDriver,80
Comment =_COMMENT,100
Æ Name (keywords) and length of the fields in the legend of the curve
displays.
Note: Do not modify the keywords left to the equation sign.
Description to [TREND.ATTRIBUTES]:
This section the trend legend is defined. Each input describes one column. (The example above has
10 columns).
<Column Name> = <DBKEY>,<Pixel Length>
Example: Signal = _KB_SignalName,200
<Column Name> is the text in the legend what is set for the title of the column. <DBKEY> is the key
word for the database field and <Pixel Length> is the length of the column. For <DBKEY> all
reachable database fields are possible (also the user defined).
There are some additional keys <DBKEY>. These special keys are marked with a prefix _. There is no
database information. These keys are internal keys of the trend. The following inputs are necessary:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 26

PGIM 5
<DBKEY>
_INDEX Number of the signal in the trend
_KB_VALUE actual value on the right hand side of the trend
_KB_MBA Scale start in the trend
_KB_MBE Scale end in the trend
_KB_DBACCESS Used database function [Special].
_KB_MX_PLUS_B Used transformation [Special].
_KB_SignalName Name of the wanted Signal
_COMMENT,100 Field for user defined comments. These comments are available in this trend
Section [Trend]
VISUALMODE = NORMAL Æ The thickness of the letters in the curve display can be changed
from "NORMAL" to "BOLD".
[APIPRO]
APIPROIFPATH=D:\apipro\apipro42\work If the maintenance program APIPRO is in use, a direct
connection between PGIM and the data in APIPRo can be set. The path to APIPRO is set in this
section.
[GEDContextMenu]
Applikation1=Action.Bat
At each signal in the PGIM graphic a context menu appears if you click the right mouse button. This
example shows an "Applikation1". If you click this function the file "Action.Bat" is active.
A file with the name "CMD.INI" is created in the Client-folder (...PlantConnect.bin\client\). The following
information is set in that file:
[Tags]
A1=\\MIP311\SM\HyperPIMS\3D_Z
[Common]
CalledFrom=D:\PGIM\PlantConnect\Graphic1.ged
ScreenPosX=510
ScreenPosY=509
The input in [Tags] shows the signal, what you selected in the graphic.
"Action.Bat" can start a program that uses this information in the CMD.ini file as a parameter.
[1ANumContextMenu]
AlarmClient=default.eaf
[2ANumContextMenu]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 27

PGIM 5
2D-View=View2D.vbs
[3ANumContextMenu]
3D-View=VIew3D.vbs
[nANumContextMenu]
Note:
In the trend, different context menus may be superimposed depending on the number of selected
signals. A distinction is made between:
- 1 signal selected,
- 2 signals selected,
- 3 signals selected,
- >3 signals selected.
For each of the above cases, a separate section is provided in the PlaCo.INI:
[1ANumContextMenu]
[2ANumContextMenu]
[3ANumContextMenu]
[nANumContextMenu]
Example:
[1ANumContextMenu]
Browse additional info ... = AppA.VBS
[2ANumContextMenu]
Correlation ... = Correla.XLS
[3ANumContextMenu]
[nANumContextMenu]
3D representation = Do3DView.EXE
Example of a PlaCo.INI for a PGIM Client:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 28

PGIM 5
[PlantConnect]
Server=No
GED=Yes
KillNotUsedConnectionsAfterHours=48
[Server.Settings]
Roh.BasePath=C:\PlantConnect.ROH\
Roh.RAMCacheSize=200
MaxSignals=100
Roh.LifeTimeDays=1000
WebClientAutoLogoffAfterMinutes=15
[GED.Settings]
MainPath=D:\PlantConnect
;AddPath=z:\
GEDFont=Arial~0~400~0~0~0~ansi~4
[SignalExplorer]
XtraTools=C:\PIMS\PlantConnect.BIN\Dokumentation\Deutsch\ScreenShow\PlantCo.pps, PPT-Show
[TREND.ATTRIBUTES]
Name=_KB_SignalName,200
No=_INDEX,20
Value=_KB_VALUE,60
Scalebeg.=_KB_MBA,50
Scaleend=_KB_MBE,50
Scalebeg.=mba,50
Scaleend=mbe,50
Dim=Dimension,60
Longtext=Langtext,250
Scanner=ScanMan,80
Driver=ScanDriver,80
CalcFunc=_KB_DBACCESS,120
Dim_Conversion=_KB_MX_PLUS_B,180
Signal=_KB_SignalName,200
Nr=_INDEX,20
Wert=_KB_VALUE,60
MBA Scale=_KB_MBA,50
MBE Scale=_KB_MBE,50
MBA Org=mba,50
MBE Org=mbe,50
CalcFct=_KB_DBACCESS,120
Dim_Transform.=_KB_MX_PLUS_B,180
Comment =_COMMENT,100
[Trend]
VISUALMODE=NORMAL
[APIPRO]
APIPROIFPATH=D:\apipro\apipro42\work
[GEDContextMenu]
Applikation1=MachDas.Bat
[1ANumContextMenu]
AlarmClient=default.eaf
[2ANumContextMenu]
[3ANumContextMenu]
3D-View=View3D.vbs
[nANumContextMenu]
Note: If the first character is a semicolon, this entry is regarded as a comment and will not be
evaluated.
Example of a PlaCo.INI for a PGIM Server:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 29

PGIM 5
[PlantConnect]
Server = Yes
GED = No
; If You have a PlantConnect EventDB also, fill in the line below:
; EventServer = <ComputerName>
; new since 2.5:

KillNotUsedConnectionsAfterHours = 48
HDAlertIfLessThanMB = 200
AtHDAlertPassMsgToApp = NetSend.bat
[Server.Settings]
Roh.BasePath = D:\PlantConnect.Roh\
Roh.RAMCacheSize = 200
MaxSignals = 1500
Roh.LifeTimeDays = 1000
WEBPort = 8081
WebClientAutoLogoffAfterMinutes=15
[GED.Settings]
MainPath = C:\PlantConnect
; AddPath = d:\XYZ
[SignalExplorer]
;XtraTools=C:\PlantConnect\PPTShow\PlantCo_d.ppt, PPT-Show
[TREND.ATTRIBUTES]
Signal = _KB_SignalName,200
Nr = _INDEX,20
Wert = _KB_VALUE,60
MBA Skala = _KB_MBA,50
MBE Skala = _KB_MBE,50
MBA Org = mba,50
MBE Org = mbe,50
Dim = Dimension,60
Langtext = Langtext,350
Scanner = ScanMan,80
Driver = ScanDriver,80
BerFkt = _KB_DBACCESS,120
Dim_Umrechnung = _KB_MX_PLUS_B,180
[Trend]
VISUALMODE = NORMAL
1.2.3.6 Installation of a component from the PGIM EventManagement

To install a component from the PGIM EventManagement, follow the instructions in the
EventManagement configuration.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 30

PGIM 5
1.3 Security Concept
1.3.1 Introduction
In PGIM it is possible to configure individual applications or signals with different rights and thus to
provide the following functionalities:
Data security
Data integrity
Different hierarchy levels
Different responsibilities
The "UserManager" serves for managing the PGIM user rights. By means of this "UserManager" the
PGIM system administrator (SysAdmin) can establish new users or user groups, assign passwords
and allocate the different rights to the individual user groups or to the signals.
1.3.2 Functionality
In order to be able to work within PGIM, each user must log on at the database by entering his name
and his password. In PGIM each user can be exactly allocated to a group. There are eight different
groups in PGIM and the group of system administrators. Only the system administrators are allowed to
connect signals from a ScanManager into the database. The system administrators can assign the
names of the eight user groups. All rights which are assigned in PGIM always refer to the user groups,
never to an individual user. In PGIM the rights are assigned to the individual signals. There are three
different rights per signal:
Read The right to read the signal and its values.
Write The right to write and to delete values for the signal.
The right to write and to delete the descriptions for the signal or to delete the signal itself
Confi
(including all archived values).
A specific right for a specific signal can be assigned to a user group, or it can be removed. Such an
assignment may only be performed by the PGIM system administrator (SysAdmin).
For each of the signals, the rights are stored in the database under the property "RTS". The storage is
done in a bit pattern.
RTS Bit pattern
Read Write Confi
PGIM user groups PGIM user groups PGIM user groups
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3rd byte 2nd byte 1st byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Or binary
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9388608
4194304
2097152
1048576
524288
262144
131072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Thus, for each signal the rights can arbitrarily be set for each of the groups.
• 1 (high) in the bit pattern means that the right has been assigned to the group.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 31

PGIM 5
• 0 (low) in the bit pattern means that the right has not been assigned to the group.
The property "RTS", for example, is displayed as a character string in the SignalExplorer. In this
representation, each of the three bytes (read/write/confi) is displayed by a two-digit hexadecimal
number.
Thus the signal with the property RTS = "0F0705" has the following rights:
Read All PGIM user groups can read the signal.
The user groups 1, 2 and 3 may archive values for this signal or delete them from the
Write
archives.
confi Only the user groups 1 and 3 may change the describing information for this signal.
The following table again shows the allocation of the bit pattern in this example to the user groups and
rights:
Read Write confi
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0F 07 05
1KGD 400111 December 2006 32

PGIM 5
1.4 UserManager
1.4.1 Introduction
The UserManager module manages the PGIM user rights. By means of this "UserManager" the PGIM
system administrator (SysAdmin) can establish new users or user groups, assign passwords and
allocate the different rights to the individual user groups or to the signals.
1.4.2 Call-in of the UserManager

The UserManager can be started by selecting the entry UserManager from the program group PGIM
(Start->Programs->PlantConnect->Tools->UserManager)
When starting the UserManager, you must determine the database to be configured.
PCCS001E.GIF
In order to be able to start the UserManager, you must have the rights of a PGIM system administrator
for the indicated database.
To call up the UserManager the first time in order to get the rights of a PGIM system administrator you
must enter the user name "administrator" and the Password "PlantConnect".
1KGD 400111 December 2006 33

PGIM 5
1.4.3 Arrangement of the different control elements in the

UserManager
User groups User list

Structure tree
Change the view,

press F6
PCCS002E.GIF
The figure shows the UserManager screen. The legends at the most important control elements of the
UserManager are defined here to get a uniform nomenclature. The UserManager is operated almost
exclusively via the context menu of the right mouse button or the "Drag and Drop" functionality of
Windows.
1.4.4 UserManager functionality:
1.4.4.1 Display users and user groups

After the SysAdmin has logged in (see 1.4.2), the different user groups will automatically be displayed
in the structure tree. The users of a group are displayed in the user list when a specific group is
selected in the structure tree.
1.4.4.2 Rename user group

Except for the group "SysAdmin", all user groups in the structure tree can be renamed. A dialog is
called via the context menu "rename".
1.4.4.3 Add new user

Select the user, and then click the right mouse button (right-click). Select Add User:
Enter the name of the user, and then set the password.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 34

PGIM 5
1.4.4.4 Change password for users

The dialog for entering a new password (see 1.4.4.3) can also be called by double-clicking the symbol
of the PGIM user. SysAdmin can change the password for the users at any time.
1.4.4.5 Allocate users to another group

A user can be allocated from the user list to the different groups in the structure tree by using a drag-
and-drop operation.
1.4.4.6 Allocate rights for specific signals to specific user groups

To configure the allocation of signals to the groups and to the different rights, the SignalExplorer must
be started in addition to the UserManager. Select the signals, and then drag them from the signal list
of the SignalExplorer to a group in the structure tree of the UserManager. The following dialog
displays the user rights: read, write and configure can be set or revoked for the selected signals.
1.4.4.7 Allocate application rights to a specific user group

To set the application rights for a specific user group, right-click the group:
The rights can be activated or deactivated via the check boxes.

If no rights are activated, the User can create only trends and can use all configured functions in the
navigator.
Configuration of process-graphics with the Editor means:
- Rights to create and change graphics
- Rights to create reports out of the Navigator
1KGD 400111 December 2006 35

PGIM 5
- Rights to create calculations out of the Navigator
- Rights to create event views out of the Navigator
- Rights to create and change Navigator folders
Start, stop and deleting of signals with the SignalExplorer means
- The Scanner neighborhood in the SignalExplorer is reachable. This gives the rights to start, stop
and delete signals.
Limited Operation Mode means:
- Right to open the Navigator
- No right to close the PGIM Control Panel
- The user can see the PGIM pictures and trends if they are reachable in a startup picture. This
startup picture must be located in the startup folder of the PGIM Navigator.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 36

PGIM 5
1.5 Signal Names

A PGIM signal name uniquely identifies a specific measuring point in a PGIM system.
All inquiries regarding the measured values or the description of signals are addressed in the PGIM
database.
For all clients, the signals are set up as follows:
PGIM signal name = \\DbName\ScanManName\ScanDriverName\SignalName
DbName This is the TCP/IP name of the computer on which the database has been
installed. The name is unique as only one database each may be implemented
on a computer.
ScanManName This is the TCP/IP name of the computer on which the ScanManager has been
installed. The name is unique as only one ScanManager each may be
implemented on a computer.
ScanDriverName This is assigned by the user during the installation of the ScanDrivers. The user
must take care that all names used for the drivers, which are implemented in a
ScanManager, will be unique.
SignalName This is the name being used by the lower-level distributed control system (In a
power plant, this can be a name from the KraftwerkKennzeichnungsSystem
(power plant identification system), in process engineering plants, for example,
AnlagenKennZeichnungssystem (plant identification system)).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 37

PGIM 5
1.6 Status Information

Description Abbr.
0 1 &H1 Off scan AO
1
1 2 &H2 Default value a1
Hardware(PLS)
2 4 &H4 Invalid AU
1st Byte
3 8 &H8 Limit value infringement AG

1
4 16 &H10 Overflow a4
1
5 32 &H20 Underflow a5
6 64 &H40 Simulated AS
7 128 &H80 Communication disturbance AK
0 256 &H100 Off scan ScanManager SO
1 512 &H200 Off scan database DO
2 1024 &H400 Not available (past, future) NV
Software(PlaCo)
3 2048 &H800 Infringement of max. limit value MA

2nd Byte
4 4096 &H1000 Infringement of min. limit value MI

5 8192 &H2000 Infringement of increasing limit LR
value
6 16384 &H4000 Infringement of decreasing limit LF
value
7 32768 &H8000 Error in calculation (tech. calculation CE
or accounting)
The Status Information in PGIM can be different between the connected systems. See the
configuration of the control systems.
1
Only ScanDriver Maestro-UX
1KGD 400111 December 2006 38

PGIM 5
1.7 Time Zones

In the PGIM databases all time information is stored in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). The connected
scanners and clients convert the local PC time at any write access into GMT, and at any read access
GMT is converted into the local PC time. Using this procedure, problems like different time zones and
summer / wintertime changeover are resolved.
In order to ensure a correct summer / winter time conversion of the archived measured values over a
longer period, the data of time changeover must be stored on each client for the coming and past
years.
This is done in the file:
…\PlantConnect.SYS\SysKonfi\TimeZone.txt
The structure of the file must have a specific predefined layout:

Example of a TimeZone.txt
OffsetFromGMT = +1
DayLightBias = +1
1980;30.03.1980 01:00;28.09.1980 01:00
1981;29.03.1981 01:00;27.09.1981 01:00
1982;28.03.1982 01:00;26.09.1982 01:00
1983;27.03.1983 01:00;25.09.1983 01:00
1984;25.03.1984 01:00;30.09.1984 01:00
…
1999;28.03.1999 01:00;31.10.1999 01:00
2000;26.03.2000 01:00;29.10.2000 01:00
2001;25.03.2001 01:00;28.10.2001 01:00
2002;31.03.2002 01:00;27.10.2002 01:00
2003;30.03.2003 01:00;26.10.2003 01:00
2004;28.03.2004 01:00;31.10.2004 01:00
2005;27.03.2005 01:00;30.10.2005 01:00
2006;26.03.2006 01:00;29.10.2006 01:00
2007;25.03.2007 01:00;28.10.2007 01:00
2008;30.03.2008 01:00;26.10.2008 01:00
2009;29.03.2009 01:00;25.10.2009 01:00
…
1KGD 400111 December 2006 39

PGIM 5
1.7.1 Function of TimeZone
1.7.1.1 Time format

Three different conversion functions are possible:
1.7.1.1.1 FileTime
- 64bit Integer.
- Beginning time is 01.01.1601.
- A 1 is equal to 100 ns
- Declared in Winbase.h; include Windows.h.
1.7.1.1.2 Unix-stile time format Double Values (used in PGIM)

- 64bit IEEE Double.
- Beginning time is 01.01.1970.
- A 1 is equal to 1 sec,
- Resolution according to mantissa, (ca. 10 ns?).
1.7.1.1.3 VisualBasic /VB/VBA,etc.)-like Double Values

- 64bit IEEE Double.
- beginning time is 30 December 1899.
- A 1 is equal to one day.
1.7.1.2 Converting function

The parameter of the function are all "by reference" meaning to set as a pointer. The parameter
MyDate must be a pointer (of type time format) to the convert date. These functions then give back the
converted time (FILETIME, double). The declarations of the functions in Visual Basic are described in
the example in the index "VBSampleTimeZone".
FILETIME FTLocal2FTGmt (FILETIME *MyDate, short *BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)

FILETIME FTGmt2FTLocal(FILETIME *MyDate, short *BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)
double UnxGmt2UnxLocal(double *MyDate, short *BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)

double UnxLocal2UnxGmt(double *MyDate, short *BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)
double DATEGmt2DATELocal(double *MyDate, short *BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)

double DATELocal2DATEGmt(double *MyDate, short *BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 40

PGIM 5
1.7.1.3 Short TimeZoneTableLoaded(void) :

This function returns an error code if the DLL is not proper initialized.
The return value "short" is equivalent to the data type integer in VB.
Return code:
0 : DLL proper initialized.
1 : TimeZone.txt not available.
2 : Error in TimeZone.txt, the first or second line is not correct.
3 : Error in TimeZone.txt, one or more of the lines are not correct.
1.7.1.4 Void Initialize (void) :

This function does the new initialization of the DLL. For example if at the runtime the
- TimeZone.txt has been changed
- A void-DLL-Function in VB is declared as Sub.
1.7.1.5 Double FileTime2UnixDbl (FILETIME *Date)

These functions change UNIX to FILETIME and back.
FILETIME UnixDbl2FileTime (double UnxDate)
double Date2Unix(double MyDate)

double Unix2Date(double UnxDate)
These functions change the date to Unix and back. MyDate must be "double" complement to VB as
"Date"
1.7.1.6 BiasFlag
The BiasFlag is a return code that returns information about summer-(BiasFlag=2) or winter-
(BiasFlag=1) time.
EXCEPTION:
In the case of the Local2GMT-function the BiasFlag has a control function. It is in an output parameter.
This resolves a potential problem with the change between summer and winter time. In that moment
one hour is set two times. You must give the information for example 02:30 summer- (BiasFlag=2) or
winter time (BiasFlag=1) to change in GMT. (If you set BiasFlag=0, this parameter is set to BiasFlag=1
internally).
1.7.1.7 Return Code

The return code returns the information about the time change. Normally the return code should be =0.
Cases:
ReturnCode = 0 : "Everything OK".
ReturnCode = 1 Not clear. Possible in the case of changing from summer to winter time in the
function Local2GMT. One hour is set two times
1KGD 400111 December 2006 41

PGIM 5
ReturnCode = 2 : "not available". Possible in the case of changing from winter to summer time.
There is one hour missing. BiasTime is set to winter time. The return value is the
hour before the changing hour.
ReturnCode = 3 : "Date is not in the TimeZone.txt table". Return values are set as winter time. No
real error. This is only a note.
1.7.2 Build up of TimeZone.txt

Example for German time zone :(GMT+1):
OffsetFromGMT = +1
DayLightBias = +1
1980;30.03.1980 01:00;28.09.1980 01:00
1981;29.03.1981 01:00;27.09.1981 01:00
1982;28.03.1982 01:00;26.09.1982 01:00
(usw.)
Example for Brazil time zone:

OffsetFromGMT = -3
DayLightBias = +1
1980;19.10.1980 05:00;08.02.1981 04:00;
1981;18.10.1981 05:00;14.02.1982 04:00;
1982;17.10.1982 05:00;13.02.1983 04:00;
Meaning:
Line 1: "OffsetFromGMT = +1"

- Offset of Local time to GMT.
German time zone : "OffsetFromGMT = +1"
Brazil time zone: "OffsetFromGMT = -3"
Line 2:
- Difference of summer- to winter time in hours.
In Germany: "DayLightBias = +1"
In China: "DayLightBias = 0"
From line 3 and following:

<Start date and time of summer time in GMT!>;<End date and time of summer time in GMT!>
Note: These times must be set in GMT. Only GMT is definite.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 42

PGIM 5
1.8 Used Ports

The communication between PGIM uses TCP/IP. Several ports are used.
Application Port Bemerkung
PlaCoInstaller 4243/TCP adjustable in PlaCoUpdate.ini
[Service]
Port = xxxx
CalcServer 1111/TCP adjustable in Registry:
Hartmann & Braun\PlantConnect\CS_Port = xxxx
Compressor 1478/TCP adjustable in PCComp.ini:
[Remote]
Port = xxxx
EventImport 9909/TCP fixed
EventImport 1433/TCP Default for ODBC Settings
ScanManager 2069/TCP fixed
CCO-Timesynchronisation 9999/UDP fixed
only for connections via ONet (Melody, Contronic E)
ConMea Service 2070/UDP fixed
Server 4242/TCP Default Settings; adjustable in PlaCo.ini
Server 2424/TCP Redundancy link (only internally)
Server 89/TCP Internet Explorer and Web Clients
adjustable in PlaCo.ini
[Server.Settings]
WEBPort = xx
Client 5079/TCP only for remote call
1KGD 400111 December 2006 43

PGIM 5
1.9 Range (double, float)

Range of Floating-Point Types
Type Minimum value Maximum value

float +/-1.175E-38 +/ 3.401E38 (needs 4 bytes)
double +/-2.225E-308 +/-1.797E308 (needs 8 bytes)
double mantissa:
14 digits, 13 digits if exponent is high negative
float mantissa:
Normally max. 6 - 7 digits. (6 in high negative exponent ranges)
8 digits only if no decimal places and value less equal 16500000:
Example:
16499998.0 + 1.0 = 16499999.0
16499999.0 + 1.0 = 16500000.0
16500000.0 + 1.0 = 1.65e7
->rounding calculation to 7 digits if above 16500000
16500000.0 + 4.0 = 1.65e7 <- rounded down
16500000.0 + 5.0 = 1.650001e7 <- rounded up
1e25 + 1e20 = 1.00001e25
1e26 + 1e20 = 1.000001e26
1e27 + 1e20 = 1.0e27 <- rounded
-> rounding to 6 digits if exponent high negative:

1.0e-20 + 1e-24 = 1.0001e-20
1.0e-20 + 1e-25 = 1.00001e-20
1.0e-20 + 1e-26 = 1.0e-20 <-rounded
->Recommendation for PGIM Counters: double
1.10 Maintenance Interval

In some installations and server versions it could happen that the PGIM server falls asleep after a
period of 49 days intermittent.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 44

PGIM 5
PGIM now offers the possibility of a so-called “Maintenance Interval”. This Maintenance interval solves
the problem described above. Typically it will be executed once a month. For configuration, browse
and open with you text editor
<PGIM main path>\Server\PlaCo.INI
In here you will find a section:
:
[Server.Maintenance]
Enabled=Yes
DayOfMonth=15
Hour=5
Enable gives you the ability to enable or disable (Enabled=no) the maintenance interval. Default is to
enable it.
DayofMonth describes on which day of the month the system will execute the service interval.
Hour tells you at what time of the day the maintenance is executed on the specific day (24hours).
By default this feature for new installations is enabled. For upgrade it is necessary that the file
<PGIM main path>\Server\PlaCo.INI
is not write protected.
For the maintenance interval, PGIM closes the internal IP Server for about 20 seconds. During this
time frame clients will not be able to contact the server. Since clients will use there “retry”-algorithm no
data will be lost.
On redundant servers all clients will be redirected immediately to the redundant partner. For this it is
important, that the maintenance interval is set differently on both servers, e.g. server 1 on the 10th of
each month, server 2 on the 20th.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 45

PGIM 5
2 Scanner
2.1 Introduction
The flexible architecture of the PGIM System allows for decentralized data acquisition on what are
generally called scanners. In the scanners, preprocessing of data can be done so that it is possible to
implement quantity, operating hours and switching cycle counters. By means of additional limit values
and the generation of messages resulting from limit value infringements or binary signals, the scanner
becomes a powerful tool.
The scanners are equipped with a configurable temporary storage (buffer) where data can be stored if
the connection to the server is interrupted. In this way, a loss of data, for example, in the case of
network problems, will be avoided. This mechanism allows the decentralized distribution of separate
scanner computers.
PGIM Client PGIM Client PGIM Client PGIM Client
PGIM Server
PGIM Scanner
To acquire data, high-capacity scanners are available for various control systems:
ABB ControlIT AC800M/F (OPC)

ABB OperateIT Process Portal (OPC)
ABB Symphony (Melody, Harmony, Maestro-UX, Maestro-NT)
ABB PROCONTROL P14
ABB Freelance 2000 (OPC)
ABB Contronik E, Contronik 3, Contronik P
ABB Infi90
ABB Sattline
Siemens S5, S7, Teleperm M, ME, MEA, XP
1KGD 400111 December 2006 46

PGIM 5
Intellution iFIX
OPC Client
Modbus (Master and Slave)
Mark IV / Mark V / Mark VI
ASCII file
The OPC scanner allows you to connect to all control and acquisition systems which provide an OPC
server. OPC is the standard for system connection which is supported by most of the systems.
More scanners can be re-implemented at any time for new systems.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 47

PGIM 5
2.2 ScanManager
2.2.1 Introduction
The ScanManager is the interface and the organizer for the connected ScanDrivers. A ScanDriver is
used for each connected system (data source).
The ScanManager is started as a Windows service and starts automatically at the start of Windows.
When required, the data acquired via the ScanDriver are provided with a time-stamp in the
ScanManager, sorted chronologically and transmitted via a TCP/IP interface to the server (database).
Depending on the system structure, the ScanManager can be installed on the same PC on which the
PGIM server is running. In distributed structures, the ScanManager can also be installed on a
separate PC.
If the connection between ScanManager and server is disrupted, the data will be stored temporarily in
a buffer and transmitted to the server when the connection has been restored. The size of the buffer
(temporary storage) depends on the hard disk storage of the computer.
2.2.2 Settings
Using system settings in an INI file, the ScanManager can be set for different applications. For the
standard application with PGIM, the ScanMan.INI file is not required. Changes in the settings should
be coordinated with ABB in order not to jeopardize the operation of PGIM.
ScanMan.INI
[ScanMan]
# Name of the ScanManager for the database(s)
# Name = demo
# Tolerance band for measured values in % of the measuring range
# DefaultDeadband = 1.0
# Name of the Eventserver
# EventServer = placo_1
# DisableOffscanFlag = TRUE
[Database]
# Portnumber = 4242
Protokoll = 1
[Name of Database]
Buffersize = 1000000
"Name = demo"
In addition to the KKS (power plant identification system) or AKZ (plant identification system)
description, the signal name of a PGIM signal also includes the name of the computer on which the
ScanManager has been installed. If this name is changed, it is possible to indicate the desired name in
the ScanMan.ini file under the entry "Name =". The name entered here overwrites the network name
of the computer, which is used by default for PGIM. Any free name can be used here.
Warning: The name of the ScanManager must be unique for PGIM.
"DefaultDeadband = 1.0"
This parameter sets a tolerance band when signals are connected for the first time. This tolerance
band is overwritten by settings done via the SignalExplorer.
"EventServer = placo_1"
If PGIM is to be used with an event management, it is necessary to indicate the name of the computer
on which the event acquisition is running (see the Event management chapter).
"DisableOffscanFlag = TRUE"
1KGD 400111 December 2006 48

PGIM 5
Special case: To set no "ScanManager Offscan Status" (Status 256) set this parameter. If the
parameter is not set, the "ScanManager Offscan Status" is active (normal conditions).
"Portnumber = 4242"
PGIM communicates via the TCP/IP protocol. This protocol is divided into different ports. By default,
port 4242 is used. If the port number is changed in just this INI file, data transfer between the
ScanManager and the database will be interrupted. This parameter should only be changed in
coordination with ABB.
"Protokoll = 1"
If this parameter is set to 1 in PGIM version 3.x a new protocol between ScanManager and database
is active. If this Parameter is missing or is not 1, the ScanManager communication runs with the old
protocol. The normal condition is to have this parameter set to 1.
[Name of DataBase]
Buffersize = 1000000
During the start of the first signal connected to any PGIM database a folder ....\ScanMan\Buffer will be
created. The buffer file can keep one million entries of process-values. The total size of file can be
determined by the following equation:
Size [kB] = (1000000 entries * 20 Byte + 32 Byte overhead) / 1024
Note:
If the first character in the ScanMan.ini file is a hash, this entry is regarded as a comment and will not
be evaluated.
2.2.3 Zero Point Cut off

In some circumstances it is required to cut off values which are lower than the configured Zero Point
e.g. which can simply come through improper configured sensors. To suppress these negative values
and put them to Zero the following method can be applied:
[ScanMan]
# Default is FALSE
CutNegativeValues = TRUE
To configure do the following steps:
Edit the Scan Managers configuration file located in
…\PGIM\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\scanman
Insert in the section [ScanMan] the following line:

CutNegativeValues = TRUE
1KGD 400111 December 2006 49

PGIM 5
To activate this feature for a specific signal, you need to enable the leakage flow suppression. Do this
by adding a value in the “range” test box of the signal explorer’s ScanManager tab.
2.2.4 Function to suppress leakage flow added.

More stable behavior in writing SM-Offscan state to clients.
In a parallel setup it's possible to suppress the SM-Offscan state as one of the ScanManager is alive.
To enable this, it's neccessary to enable the redundancy function of the ScanManager and add an
additional switch to the scanman.ini file:
[ScanMan]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 50

PGIM 5
800xAOffScanHandling = TRUE
The restart file contains additional attributes for the started signals. The old file will be automatically
converted to the new format.
The file extension changes to *.fdb.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 51

PGIM 5
2.3 ScanDriver
2.3.1 Introduction
ScanDrivers are available for different distributed control systems to acquire process data. These
ScanDrivers are always adapted to the connected data source. They control the communication to the
control and data acquisition systems. The transferred data is edited to transmit in a standard form to
the ScanManager.
Additional ScanDrivers can be implemented for new systems.
In addition to on-line data transfer, manual inputs into the system (for example for laboratory data) are
also possible. The virtual ScanDriver is available for the management of signals generated locally in
PGIM.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 52

PGIM 5
2.4 Virtual ScanDriver
2.4.1 Introduction
The virtual ScanDriver generates signals that are captured by the PGIM system (for example
Technical calculations). The configuration of the signals is performed via an associated configuration
file, which contains information on the signals.
To edit new signals in the Virtual ScanDriver (VSD) there is a VSD-Editor available in the
SignalExplorer. Refer to the configuration for the VSD-Editor in the SignalExplorer chapter.
PGIM Client PGIM Client PGIM Client
MS Windows
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
VSD ScanDriver
Applications such as
- PGIM Technical Calculations
- PGIM Manual Input
- Customer specific applications
2.4.2 Installation
By selecting the virtual ScanDriver in the user-defined installation of PGIM, the following subfolder will
be created:
…\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanDriver
The ASCII-ScanDriver is listed here with the name VSD.DLL.
2.4.2.1 Configuration
In addition to the driver, one or several configuration files are required to provide necessary
information on the available signals to the PGIM system.
Te configuration folder exists in the setup system.
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_VSDScanner\
Lower-level folders are interpreted as logical ScanDrivers, where the folder name corresponds to the
ScanDriver name. By default the folder name is VSD.
In this folder, a folder with the name "KONFI" must exist where the signal configuration file
KONFI.CSV resides.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 53

PGIM 5
Additionally, a control file for the scanner may reside in this folder with the name VSD.INI. With an
entry in this file, the cyclic updating of the time-stamps in the VSD can be controlled. This possibility is
relevant when the VSD is operated in connection with the PGIM counter application, but also an
improved functionality is achieved for "normal" signals.
The cyclic updating operates as follows:
When a signal is captured, this is usually recorded with the current system time (for example: t1). If the
ScanManager is stopped at the time t2 > t1 now, the ScanManager will write the last value with the
time-stamp t1 and the status "ScanManager Offscan" into the database. If there is a large difference
between t1 and t2, this will lead to wrong information in the database due to the fact that the signal
has been valid until the time t2. To improve this behavior, the scanner can cyclically approximate the
time-stamp of the signals to the present. If, for example, the parameter "DelayTime" is set to 90
seconds, each time-stamp in the VSD that is older than 90 seconds will be adjusted to the present
time. In order to keep the CPU load low, this check is performed once a minute.
To ensure that after a restart of the ScanManager, the last values of the scanner will be available
again, the VSD.rst file is created in the folder \PlantConnect.SYS\SysKonfi\Scanner\VSD. In this file,
all current measured values are saved in a binary form. When starting the scanner this information is
obtained and the time-stamps will be updated according to the algorithm described above.
2.4.2.1.1 Structure of the VSD.INI control file

The VSD.INI file includes a section with the name "Main". Within this section, a keyword "DelayTime"
exists. This keyword allows you to indicate a time in seconds by which the cyclically generated time-
stamps are delayed compared to the current system time. This can ensure that calculation results will
be transmitted in chronological order to the ScanManager.
[Main]
DelayTime = 90
2.4.2.1.2 Structure of the signal configuration file KONFI.CSV

The division of the KONFI.CSV file is preset. There must always be 11 columns and also 11
semicolons as separators between the columns in one line. If the first character is a semicolon, this
line is regarded as a comment line and will not be evaluated.
Explanation of the columns:
Column A: Signal type (analog, binary)
Column B: Signal name to be displayed for this signal in PGIM (KKS, AKZ, arbitrary)
Column C: Direction as seen from PGIM (READ)
Column D: Descriptive text for the signal
Column E: Measuring range start
Column F: Measuring range end
Column G: Dimension of the signal
Column H: Status text OFF for binary signals
Column I: Status text ON for binary signals
Column J: empty
1KGD 400111 December 2006 54

PGIM 5
Column K: empty
Column L: Description
The Scanner expects, for historical reasons, 11 columns, but ignores the last 3.
An example of a Konfi_Datei (configuration file) is available in …\PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\

Konfi_VSDScanner\
1KGD 400111 December 2006 55

PGIM 5
2.5 ABB PGIM System Scandriver

The system ScanDriver produces signals, which are captured by the PGIM computer. Changing the
signals is not possible. The existing signals like "Scanner Uptime", „System Uptime", "disk space",
"physical memory" and "process count" are available in the scanner neighborhood.
PGIM Client PGIM Client PGIM Client
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
System ScanDriver
PGIM System
2.5.1 Installation
Choose the System ScanDriver in the user defined installation of PGIM and the following folder will be
created:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanDriver
The "System ScanDriver" has the name SystemScanner.dll.
In the scanner neighborhood the System ScanDriver is set with the name "SYS".
These parameters are available:
CPUUsage : Used CPU in percent
Usedspace_drive X : Used disc space on drive X in MB
Freespace_drive X : Free available space on drive X in MB
UsedPhyMemory : User physical memory in Percent
XXXXXXX_Ping : Reply time of the TCP/IP connection in ms
PhysMemory : free physical memory in MB
1KGD 400111 December 2006 56

PGIM 5
CurrentProcesses : Count of running processes
ScannerUptime : Runtime of the scanner in hours
SystemUptime : Runtime of the system in hours
2.5.2 SystemScanner.ini
Settings are set in the SystemScanner.ini file. Up to 49 signals are possible to call via ping. Each of
these destinations must be reachable by TCP/IP. The network address is part of the signal name.
Example for a SystemScanner.ini file

[NetPing]
1=mip1035
2=deutaminw1212
3=www.abb.com
...
These network addresses will be available in the Scanner neighborhood with the name
"Address_ping". The signal value is the return time in milliseconds (ms). Values between –2 up to –7
are error codes.
Error codes :
-2 :Unable to locate ICMP.DLL ICMP.DLL not found
-3 :get host by name failed unknown computer name
-4 :Failed to get proc addr for function function call not possible
-5 :Unable to open ping service the Ping Service can not be opened
-6 :Failed to allocate global ping packet buffer error in the Ping Service
-7 :Error obtaining info from ping packet Error obtaining info from ping packet
1KGD 400111 December 2006 57

PGIM 5
2.6 ABB PGIM WatchDog ScanDriver

The WatchDog ScanDriver reads signals from the ScanManager. A configuration of the signals is not
necessary. The available signals WatchDog01 and WatchDog02 are in the scanner neighborhood of
the SignalExplorer.
PGIM PGIM PGIM

Client Client Client
LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
LAN (TCP/IP)
Reading of current
Creating of two values
alternating signals
in the Scanner
PGIM ScanManager
WatchDog ScanDriver PGIM
2.6.1 Installation
Choose the WatchDog ScanDriver in the user defined installation of PGIM and the following folder will
be created:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanDriver
The "WatchDog ScanDriver" has the name WatchDogScanner.dll.
In the scanner neighborhood the System ScanDriver is set with the name "WDS". With the
WatchDogServer application it is possible to control the connection between the Scanner and the
Server.
In the case of one scanner it is enough to have one WatchDog signal. See the WatchDogServer
configuration for details.
In the case of two parallel scanners, each scanner can have in the configuration of the
WatchDogServer one signal. One is in use for one Scanner, the second for the parallel scanner.
For Example:
From scanner1 WatchDog01 is in use
From scanner2 WatchDog02 is in use
Special case: In the case of parallel Scanners, copy the restart file from one scanner to the other. This
will set back the settings.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 58

PGIM 5
1KGD 400111 December 2006 59

PGIM 5
2.7 ABB Contronic 3
2.7.1 Introduction
For connection of PGIM to the distributed control system Contronic 3 (C3), a driver is available for the
communication on the C3 cubicle bus.
Bus-capable C3 modules (MZ03, XU03/04, XU13/14, and SL04/05) can be addressed via the C3
cubicle bus and transmit signal data.
The PGIM PC is linked via a serial connection (V24/OWG transducer/OWG cable/HW81) with the C3
module HW81 that performs the communication between cubicle bus and V24 interface. As the C3
signals do not have time-stamps, each signal being transmitted is provided with a time-stamp in PGIM.
In the control system, no signal names have been assigned to the C3 signals. For processing in
PGIM, a signal name, text, dimension and measuring range must be added to each signal.
PGIM PGIM PGIM

PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
Contronic 3 ScanDriver
Multiplexer/ PGIM
converter
Serial interface reading / writing of

(fibre optics) current process values
HW81/82 HW81/82
no. 1 no. 16
Contronic 3 Slaves Contronic 3 Slaves
2.7.1.1 Contronic 3 connection requirements

The communication between PGIM and C3 is performed via a V24 RS232 interface (line 1-n). In the
bus-capable C3 modules, data blocks are created (blocks with block numbers) which can be
requested by PGIM. The blocks can be assigned with 16 signals max. (Max. number of data words:
16; 0-15). Each C3 module at the cubicle bus is addressed by the C3 interface card HW81 (slave
address 1-16).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 60

PGIM 5
2.7.1.2 Example of a C3 configuration

Below, the connection for a block is performed using a Contronic 3 program as an example. The
following software plan shows the bus section of a Contronic 3 program. The transmit block 07 is to be
connected.
In the program listing of the Contronic 3 program, the conversion of the software plan shown above
looks as follows:

Q535 BUS
NB
Txxx

T007
C100
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
T008

Transmit block 7
shall be connectd
For the connection, transmit block 007 must be noted as follows in the
Excel configuration file.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 61

PGIM 5
2.7.1.3 Configuration of the Contronic 3 connection

The configuration for the C3 connection is performed using Microsoft Excel. For each module to be
communicated with, a file is created which includes all information about the connected signals.
Excel configuration
For the configuration, an Excel workbook is available which must be processed plant-related. For each
module, an Excel spreadsheet is opened. It is useful to choose the name of the module as the
spreadsheet name.
Structure of a configuration spreadsheet:
The division of the Excel spreadsheet is preset. The columns must not be changed. The first 7 lines
include descriptive information for the columns. In the 8th line, the configuration of the communication
begins.

Column A: Continuous number for orientation; not important for the configuration
Column B: At the beginning of a new block, you will find the entry "block". Apart from this, the
column includes the data type, for example binary, analog, PackedBoolean.
Column C: Signal name to be displayed for this signal in PGIM (KKS, AKZ, arbitrary)
Column D: Line; Number of the serial connection at the PC via which the signal is connected
Column E: Slave; Number of the C3 module at the C3 cubicle bus
Column F: Block; Number of the C3 transfer block where the signal is connected
Column G: Numb. DW; Number of data words transferred in the block (signals)
Column H: Direction; Direction of the block transfer from C3 to PGIM (C3>PC) or from PGIM to
C3 (PC>C3)
Column I: DW; Data word number (position of the signal in the block)
Column J: Bit; In the case of Packed Boolean data words, up to 16 binary signals are
transferred in one word. To list them individually as a signal, they are numbered
continuously from 0 to 15.
Column K: Telegram type; It is possible to transfer different telegram types. The most common
type is the MixBlock where a mixed transfer of both analog and binary signals can be
performed. Further types are reserved to special applications and must be discussed
with H&B.
Column L: Long text; Descriptive text for the signal
Column M: MBA; Measuring range start
Column N: MBE; Measuring range end
Column O: Dimension; Dimension of the signal
Column P: Status 0; Status text OFF for binary signals
Column Q: Status 1; Statustext ON for binary signals
Column R: MAX-GW; Maximum limit value adjustable
Column S: MIN-GW; Minimum limit value adjustable
Column T: Hysteresis-GW; Hysteresis adjustable for rising limit value
Column U: Disturbance;
1KGD 400111 December 2006 62

PGIM 5
Column V: Operation;
Column W: Remark;
Column X: Last column; In this column, the following character must be entered: |
An example of a C3-Konfi_Datei resides in \PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\ Konfi_C3SBScanner\

After the block assignments have been performed for each module, a CSV file can be created for each
module from the Excel file. A CSV file has a specific format, which can be read by the PGIM C3-
ScanDriver.
Excel offers the possibility to save a single spreadsheet from a workbook in the CSV format.
In Excel, the following menus can be used:
File
Save as (select path and name)
File type (CSV (separator separately) (*.csv))
Save (Note window: Workbooks with several spreadsheets are
not supported, only the current spreadsheet will be saved;
acknowledge by OK)
File
Close (Note window: Select NO in order not to save the file in the
Excel format, but in the csv format)
By default, the file resides in the subfolder
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ Konfi_C3SBScanner\
Apart from the configuration file, further settings must be made in the "C3SB.INI" file in the folder
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ Konfi_C3SBScanner\
Example of a C3SB.ini file:
[License]
Name = Demo
REM *********************************************************************************
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM The section [HW81_??] is required for the HW81 settings.
REM A continuous numbering, starting with 0 to 31 is written
REM into the section name. This number corresponds to the
REM address line on the HW81 (HW82).
REM *****************************************************************************************************
[HW81_0]
REM The parameter ScanDriverName is the name identifier of the driver.
ScanDriverName = C3SCAN_1
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM Describes the physical serial interface of the system (here COM8 interface).
REM *****************************************************************************************************
Port = 8
REM *********************************************************************************
REM Section for a module where the last number of the address line ADRn
1KGD 400111 December 2006 63

PGIM 5
REM corresponds to the HW81.
REM *********************************************************************************
[HW81_0.SLAVE.1]
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM Name identifier of the bus-capable module.
REM *****************************************************************************************************
EPC = XU03_1
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM Module type
REM Possible entries
REM - XU03
REM - XU13
REM - MZ03
REM - SL04
REM (SL04 is also valid for an SL05)
REM *****************************************************************************************************
Typ = XU03
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM Between 2 calls of a bus telegram in order not to overload a module.
REM *****************************************************************************************************
Wartezeit = 250
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM Name of the confi file.
REM Relative path indications are also possible.
REM *****************************************************************************************************
Konfifile = ...\Konfi_C3SBScanner\Konfi Baugruppe 1.csv
REM *****************************************************************************************************
nd
REM Entry for the 2 and further modules.
REM *****************************************************************************************************
[HW81_0.SLAVE.2]
EPC = MZ03
Typ = MZ03
Wartezeit = 400
Konfifile = ...\Konfi_C3SBScanner\Konfi Baugruppe 2.csv
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM Entry for further HW81/82
REM *****************************************************************************************************
REM [HW81_1]
ScanDrivername = C3SCAN_2
Port = 7
The configuration of communication blocks in the connected Contronic 3 modules is described in the
C3 configuration.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 64

PGIM 5
2.8 ABB Conlink (Contronic 3-I, Contronic EK, Contronic P)
2.8.1 Introduction
For connection of PGIM to the ABB control systems Contronic-E/EK (CEK), Contronic 3 Information
(C3I) and Contronic-P (CP), a Conlink-ScanDriver is available which organizes the serial
communication via the Conlink protocol with the CEK, C3I and CP operator stations. The physical
connection between the systems is established via serial interfaces (V24) between PGIM Scanner-PC
and the respective operator stations of the control systems (PCV24 or PCV02).
The connection of signals is based on a concept, which makes available to the user all accessible
signals of the plant after data balancing has been performed once. These signals are determined via a
short configuration procedure of the Contronic system and provided with further information in a
connection run.
Due to the fact that the capacity of the serial interfaces of the Contronic system is limited, the user
must decide, based on PGIM, which signals will really be selected from the total number of signals.
The user can make, for each interface, a selection from all available signals. The total number of
signals is stored after the connection run in the file "CONFI.TXT".
If PGIM is used as a replacement for a previous system (ConVisa), the configuration can be used for
connection to PGIM.
PGIM PGIM PGIM
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
Conlink ScanDriver
PGIM
Multiplexer
Contronic
Serial interface reading / writing of
current process values
Central Operating Station no. 16

PCV24 or PCV02
Conlink mode
2.8.2 Folder structure ConLink connection

For the signal acquisition via Conlink, two subfolders in C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner are required.
"Konfi_Conlink Scanner" and "ConlinkNT"
2.8.2.1 Folder "Konfi_Conlink Scanner"

For the Conlink connection in PGIM, the CONFI.TXT file is of great importance because all information
on the signals is included in this file:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 65

PGIM 5
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\ZLS1_K4\CONFI.TXT
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\ZLS3_K8\CONFI.TXT ...
For each serial Conlink connection to the Contronic system, a subfolder exists. In each of these
subfolders (for example:\ZLS1_K4\) a file resides with the same name: CONFI.TXT.
The "ConlinkScanner.ini" file exists in the Konfi_ConlinkScanner folder. The following system settings
are performed:
Example of ConlinkScanner.ini :
[ConlinkServer]
Path = C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ConlinkNT
[CONLINK-LINE 1]
Name = ZLS1_K4
[CONLINK-LINE 2]
Name = ZLS3_K8
The path entry for ConLinkServer indicates the path where the program "ConlinkServer.exe" exists.
The name indicated in "CONLINK-LINE X" is added in PGIM as a ScanDriverName to the connected
signal. Refer to chapter 1.5
Note:
We strongly recommend that you use only characters accepted by Windows operating
system to create a name. Use these characters to create folders with the Windows
Explorer.
To create this CONFI.TXT file, further programs are required.
2.8.2.2 Folder " ConlinkNT "

The folder:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ConlinkNT\
Contains a software driver for the communication as well as the configuration tools for editing data.
The file "ConlinkServer.exe" is installed as service under the Windows utilities. Installation is
performed via a DOS box (On the taskbar, click the Start button, and then click Run). The program
ConlinkServer.exe is called with the parameter –install.
Call in the DOS box:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ConlinkNT\ConlinkServer –install
In the same folder, the file conlinkx.ini exists which includes settings for the communication via
the serial interface.
Structure of the file conlinkx.ini
[CONLINK-LINE 1]
PORT=2 # COM1 = 1, COM2 = 2, etc.
TIMESYNC=TRUE
UNIT=4 # Station number
SYSTEMTYPE=CK # CK = CONTRONIC EK or 3I, CP = CONTRONIC P
SYSTEMVERSION=7 # Software version, 7 or 8 => 30 or 100 blocks
1KGD 400111 December 2006 66

PGIM 5
BAUDRATE=9600 # Valid baud rates: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
STOPBIT=1 # 0: none , 1: 1 bit, 2: 1.5 bits, 3: 2 bits
PARITY=ODD # possible entries: ODD, EVEN or NO
BITS_PER_CHAR=8 # Byte size : 7, 8 bpc
TIMEOUT_QUIT=5000 # Timeout acknowledge in ms :
TIMEOUT_ANSWER=10000 # Timeout response in ms :
REPEAT_PROTOKOLL=5 # Number of protocol repeats
EVENTBUFFER_SIZE=10 # Ring buffer for events 10n entries
SHORTDOKU=KDVAX # Contronic short configuration
BLOCKDEF=d:\PlaCo\Scanner\ConlinkNt\BLOCKDEF.DAT # Contronic block def.
For each serial interface, a "CONLINK-LINE" is established.

PORT
PORT=X indicates the interface at the PGIM PC, for example: COM 1, COM 2 ...
UNIT
UNIT=X indicates the Contronic operator station being connected with the serial interface.
SYSTEMTYPE
The Contronic systems CEK and CP have different interface configurations so that an identifier must
be indicated.
SYSTEMVERSION
Contronic systems of version 7 differ from those of version 8 in that version 7 can transfer 30 blocks
via a Conlink channel whereas version 8 is able to transfer 100 blocks.
BOUDRATE, STOPBIT, PARITY, BITS_PER_CHAR
The serial interface is an RS232 interface for which the corresponding parameters must be preset.
The typical settings are indicated in the example above.
TIMEOUT_QUIT, TIMEOUT_ANSWER
Timeout settings for interface communication.
REPEAT_PROTOKOLL
Number of repeats (retries) in the case of communication problems.
EVENTBUFFER_SIZE
Buffering in the case of event transfer.
SHORTDOKU
Name structure of the short configuration procedure file for the mass storage of the connected
operator station.
BLOCKDEF
Path to the file "BLOCKDEF.DAT" where the structure of the Contronic blocks is defined (see the
Contronic block transfer section for additional information).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 67

PGIM 5
2.8.3 Contronic block transfer

The third file in the subfolder ConlinkNT is "Blockdef.dat". This file includes the structure of the
Contronic blocks to be transferred via the interface. For each interface, the blocks are defined.
###########################################################################
#
# File : BLOCKDEF.DAT
# Location : ...\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ConLinkNT\
# Description : Contronic blockdefinition as information for the Conlink
# communication service.
# Creation : 17.12.1996 (Gil)
#
###########################################################################
[Line 01]
# Table on unit 1 Channel 4

# Note: Each Conlink interface line can transfer 2 blocks per second
# block blocktype direction cycletime
# [0..100] [0:b,1:a,2:c] [0:rd,1:wr] [sec]
# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
00 1 0 15.000
01 0 0 15.000
02 2 0 15.000
03 1 0 15.000
04 0 0 15.000
05 2 0 15.000
06 1 0 15.000
07 0 0 15.000
08 2 0 15.000
#
[Line 02]
# Table on unit 3 Channel 8
# Note: Each Conlink inteface line can transfer 2 blocks per second
# block blocktype direction cycletime
# [0..100] [0:b,1:a,2:c] [0:rd,1:wr] [sec]
# -------------------------------------------------------------------------
00 1 0 5.000
01 0 0 5.000
02 2 0 5.000
03 1 0 5.000
04 0 0 5.000
05 2 0 5.000
06 1 0 5.000
07 0 0 5.000
08 2 0 5.000
09 1 0 5.000
1KGD 400111 December 2006 68

PGIM 5
Requirements for block transfer via the Conlink interface:
- Contronic of version 7 can transfer 30 blocks max., each with 30 signals max.
- Contronic of version 8 can transfer 100 blocks max., each with 120 signals max.
- Each block can be transferred with an individual cycle time.
- Each block can only transport one data type. That means binary values will be assigned to
a binary block, analog values to an analog block and counter values to a counter block.
- A Conlink interface can transfer 2 blocks per second.
- For the Contronic version 7, the max. dataset to be transferred are 900 signals max.
resulting from 30 blocks with 30 signals each at a cycle time of 15 seconds. The usage of
the interface can be calculated using the rule of three.
- For the Contronic version 8, the max. dataset to be transferred are, theoretically, 12000
signals resulting from 100 blocks with 120 signals each at a cycle time of 50 seconds. The
usage of the interface can be calculated using the rule of three.
- The blocks must be created in the Contronic system, and for each Conlink interface, a free
cycle level with a cycle time of 250 ms min. (preferably 100 ms) must be available in
Contronic. On this cycle level, a slave function is set up, and the associated blocks will be
created (see the Contronic configuration).
The tools for editing the data are stored in the folder ConlinkNT in the subfolder ....\PEX Tools\
ConLinkKonfi\. Refer to the item "Configuration of Conlink connection".
2.8.4 Configuration of ConLink connection

For the PGIM configuration, a file must be available which includes the information on the signals
existing in the connected control systems. This information can be filtered out from a short
configuration procedure of the CEK or CP system (see CEK or CP configuration).
2.8.4.1 Short configuration procedure for Contronic E and C3I

In Contronic, the short configuration procedure is composed of two parts: the short configuration
procedure format and the configuration description. Both parts are created in the Contronic system
dialog.
2.8.4.1.1 Short configuration procedure format

The following menu tree must be selected in order to reach the mask for creating the short
configuration procedure format:
CONFIGURE
COMMUNICATE
LOGS
FORMAT
<Computer-No.> (Example: PDOKVX)
<Station>
Within the format mask, a few fields must be assigned as follows:
F-T: DOKUF
F-B: SATZB,0,68 F-B: SATZB,75,4 F-B: SATZB,102,16 F-B: ASCB,3,3
1KGD 400111 December 2006 69

PGIM 5
F-B: * F-B: * F-B: * F-B: *
F-B: * F-B: * F-B: * F-B: *
F-B: * F-B: * F-B: * F-B: *
For ASCB,3,3: \0D\0A\06
STORE
EXECUTE (Y/N) <Y>
2.8.4.1.2 Short configuration procedure description

configuration procedure:
CONFIGURE
COMMUNICATE
LOGS
DOCU
ONLINE SHRT
<COMPUTER-NO: > (Example: PNES22)
<Station>
Within the configuration mask, a few fields must be assigned as follows:
SELECTION: Y
STN-NO.: *
FCTTYPE *
ASCII *
PL.AREA *
SORT: Y
1. ALPHANUM. LENGTH: 20
2. *
3. *
OUTPUT: Y
O/P PERIPH: TALLY
L-UT-F: PPA01 L-LT-F: PPE01
P-UT-F: *
MM-FILE: Y COPY ONTO PERIPHERAL: N

ARCHI: N
1KGD 400111 December 2006 70

PGIM 5
DOKU-F: <Computer-No. of Short configuration procedure format> (Example: PDOKVX)
STORE
EXECUTE (Y/N) <Y>
2.8.4.1.3 Create short configuration procedure

After format and description have been configured, the short configuration procedure can be started.
The function creates two files in the mass storage in Contronic; later on, only one of these files will be
required.
CONFIGURE
COMPUTER-NO: <Computer-No. of Short configuration procedure> (Example: PNES22)
START
Depending on the scope of signals, the creation of the short configuration procedure takes some time.
Start and end of the creation will be logged and can be checked on the monitor or on the printer.
2.8.4.1.4 Transfer short configuration procedure

After the short configuration procedure has been created in the Contronic mass storage, it can be
transferred to the host computer.
First, the host computer (PGIM computer) must be prepared.

Transfer requirements:
In case a communication is running already, it must be interrupted by stopping in System
control/Services first the "PGIM ScanManager" and second the "CONLINK-NT Service".
Now the restart file of the ScanManager is renamed in order to withdraw the old communication
settings. The restart file resides in the following folder:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanManager\Restart\ <computer name>.cdb
Rename into for example: <computer name>.cdb.old
Then the communication is reactivated by starting in System control/Services:
• First the "CONLINK-NT Service".
• Second the "PlantConnect ScanManager".
Now the CONLINK-NT Service is in the waiting state. On the Contronic operator station, the
transfer of the file (SHORT) to the Conlink channel must be started.
EXT.MEMORY
COPY
MM
ROOT
FILE: <File of Short configuration procedure > (For Example: SHORT)
CONLINK
TR. : <1>
FILE: <any filename>
1KGD 400111 December 2006 71

PGIM 5
EXECUTE (Y/N) <Y>
The transfer has been terminated when the operator station appears in the menu bar.
Now the communication is deactivated again by stopping in System control/Services:
• First the "PlantConnect ScanManager"
• Second the "CONLINK-NT Service".
On the PGIM PC, a folder "HuB" is automatically created in C:\. The short configuration procedure is
copied to this folder. The name of the file corresponds to the settings in Contronic. For further
processing, the file is renamed into "KDVAX" and copied to the folder
2.8.4.1.5 Connection run

For each function entry in the file "KDVAX" (short configuration procedure), a long answer is
requested from the Contronic system. Additionally, all known selectors are requested. The known
selectors are listed function-related in the file SELECTOR_CE_EN.Dat.
Depending on the plant size, connection can take several hours. If the selectors, which will not be
required, are known in advance, the respective selector entries can be removed in the file
SELECTOR_CE_EN.Dat.
Start requirements for the connection run:

- Activate communication by starting the "CONLINK-NT Service"
- Open DOS box and change to the folder....\Scanner\ConlinkNT\
- Rename or delete possibly existing file CONFI.TXT
- Call up the program "ConLinkKonfi.exe" as follows:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\scanner\ConlinkNT\ConLinkKonfi <COM interface >
<SystemTyp=CE|CP)
For the COM interface, the number of the interface port at the PGIM PC is
entered, for example: 2
As type of system either CE or CP is indicated.
In the DOS box, a protocol is running.
- After several hours, there is a file CONFI.TXT in the folder....\Scanner\ConlinkNT\
- Deactivate communication by stopping the "CONLINK-NT Service"
- Now the file CONFI.TXT is copied to each line configuration folder
for example: C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\ZLS1_K4
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\ZLS3_K8 ...
- Rename the restart file of the ScanManager in order to restore the old communication
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanManager\Restart\ <computer name>.cdb.old
Rename into <computer name>.cdb
- Then the communication is reactivated by starting in System control/Services
• First the "CONLINK-NT Service"
1KGD 400111 December 2006 72

PGIM 5
1KGD 400111 December 2006 73

PGIM 5
2.8.4.1.6 Contents of the file CONFI.TXT

#Signalname;Datatype;Direction;Units;ScaleBeginning;ScaleEnd;Statustext ON;Statustext
OFF;Plantarea;Shortname;alphanumerik;shorttext;Longtext;blocknumber(optional)
XB023/VXA;1;0;m@4/h;0.000000;20.000000;;;B;;0GAC10CF001 $;0GAC00;Durchfl Brunnenwasser 1;4
XB024/VXA;1;0;m@4/h;0.000000;100.000000;;;B;;0GAC10CF901 $;0GAC00;Durchfl Rohwasser Zulauf;4
XB025/VXA;1;0;m;0.000000;-13.000000;;;B;;0GAC10CL001 $;0GAC00H54;Niveau Brunnen 1;4
The information for the data direction must be set to writing from values to Contronic to the value 1.
2.8.4.2 Short configuration procedure format Contronic P

In Contronic, the short configuration procedure is composed of two parts: the short configuration
procedure format and the configuration description. Both parts are created in the Contronic system
dialog.
2.8.4.2.1 Short configuration procedure format

configuration procedure format:
KONFIGURATION
KOMMUNIKATION
PROTOKOLLE
FORMAT
<Kurzname> (Bsp.: KDVAXF)
<Station>
Within the format mask, a few fields must be assigned as follows:
F-T: DOKUF
F-B: SATZB,0,71 F-B: ASCB,1,12 F-B: SATZB,75,4 F-B: SATZB,102,16

F-B: ASCB,3,3 F-B: * F-B: * F-B: *
F-B: * F-B: * F-B: * F-B: *
F-B: * F-B: * F-B: * F-B: *
Für ASCB,1,12: \06

Für ASCB,3,3: \0D\0A\06
SPEICHERN
<Ausführen (J/N) J>
1KGD 400111 December 2006 74

PGIM 5
2.8.4.2.2 Short configuration procedure description

KONFIGURATION
KOMMUNIKATION
PROTOKOLLE
DOKU
ONLINE-KURZ
<Kurzname> (Bsp.: KDVAX)
<Station>
Within the configuration mask, a few fields must be assigned as follows:
SELEKTIERUNG: J
STN-NR.: n, m, k
FKT.ART *
ASCII *
ANL.BER *
SORTIERUNG: J
1. KURZNAME LAENGE: 20
4. *
5. *
AUSGABE: J
AUSG-GERAET: TALLY
P-UEB-F: PPA01 P-UNT-F: PPE01
S-UEB-F: *
MSP-DATEI: J COPY AUF AUSG-GERAET: N

ARCHIV: N
DOKU-F: <Kurzname des Kurzdokumentationsformates> (Bsp.: KDVAXF)
SPEICHERN
1KGD 400111 December 2006 75

PGIM 5
2.8.4.2.3 Create short configuration procedure

After format and description have been configured, the short configuration procedure can be started.
The function creates two files in the mass storage in Contronic; later on, only one of these files will be
required.
KONFIGURATION
KURZNAME: <Kurzname der Kurzdokumentation> (Bsp.: KDVAX)
START
Depending on the scope of signals, the creation of the short configuration procedure takes some time.
Start and end of the creation will be logged and can be checked on the monitor or on the printer.
2.8.4.2.4 Transfer short configuration procedure

After the short configuration procedure has been created in the Contronic mass storage, it can be
transferred to the host computer.
First, the host computer (PGIM computer) must be prepared.
Transfer requirements:
In case a communication is running already, it must be interrupted by stopping in System
control/Services the "PlantConnect ScanManager" and the "CONLINK-NT Service".
Next the restart file of the ScanManager is renamed in order to withdraw the old communication
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanManager\Restart\ <computer name>.cdb
Rename into, for example: <computer name>.cdb.old
Then the communication is reactivated by starting in System control/Services the "CONLINK-NT
Service" and the "PlantConnect ScanManager".
Now the CONLINK-NT Service is in the waiting state. On the Contronic operator station, the
transfer of the file (KDVAX) to the Conlink channel must be started.
EXT.SPEICHER
COPY
MSP
<Datei: Kurzname Kurzdoku> (Bsp.: KDVAX)
PC-KOPPL (oder CONLINK)
<Spur: 1>
<Datei: Rechner-Nr. Kurzdoku+"_CP" ENTER>
The transfer has been terminated when the operator station appears in the menu bar.
The communication is deactivated again by stopping in System control/Services the "PlantConnect
ScanManager" and the "CONLINK-NT Service".
On the PGIM PC, a folder called "HuB" is automatically created in drive C: . The short configuration
procedure is copied to this folder. The name of the file corresponds to the settings in Contronic. For
further processing, the file is renamed into "KDVAX" and copied to the folder
1KGD 400111 December 2006 76

PGIM 5
2.8.4.2.5 Connection run

For each function entry in the file "KDVAX" (short configuration procedure), a long answer is
requested from the Contronic system. Additionally, all known selectors are requested. The known
selectors are listed function-related in the file "SELECTOR_CP_EN.Dat".
Depending on the plant size, connection can take several hours. If the selectors which will not be
required, are known in advance, the respective selector entries can be removed in the file
"SELECTOR_CP_EN.Dat".
Start requirements for the connection run:

- Activate communication by starting the "CONLINK-NT Service"
- Open DOS box (On the taskbar, click the Start button, and then click Run) and change to
the folder....\Scanner\ConlinkNT\
- Rename or delete possibly existing file CONFI.TXT
- Call up the program "ConLinkKonfi.exe" as follows:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\scanner\ConlinkNT\ConLinkKonfi <COM interface >
<SystemTyp=CE|CP)
For the COM interface, the number of the interface port at the PGIM PC is
entered, for example: 2
As type of system either CE or CP is indicated.
In the DOS box, a protocol is running.
- After several hours, there is a file CONFI.TXT in the folder....\Scanner\ConlinkNT\
- Deactivate communication by stopping the "CONLINK-NT Service"
- Now the file CONFI.TXT is copied to each line configuration folder.
For example: C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\ZLS1_K4
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\ZLS3_K8 ...
- Rename the restart file of the ScanManager in order to restore the old communication
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanManager\Restart\ <computer name>.cdb.old
- Rename into <computer name>.cdb
- Then the communication is reactivated by starting in System control/Services:
• First the "CONLINK-NT Service"
1KGD 400111 December 2006 77

PGIM 5
2.8.4.2.6 Contents of the file CONFI.TXT

#Signalname;Datatype;Direction;Units;Scalebeginning;Scaleend;Statustext ON;Statustext
OFF;Plantarea;Shortname;alphanumerik;Shorttext;Longtext;blocknumber(optional)
AC3547/VXA;1;0;MG/M3;.0;2000.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG
AC3547/VWA;1;0;MG/M3;.0;2000.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG
AC3547/VWI;1;0;MG/M3;.0;2000.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG
AC3547/VWS;1;0;MG/M3;.0;2000.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG
AC3547/VWY;1;0;MG/M3;.0;2000.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG
AC3547/VXW;1;0;MG/M3;.0;2000.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG
AC3547/VYA;1;0;%;.0;100.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG;4
AC3547/VYS;1;0;%;.0;100.0;;;A;;;SO2-REGEL.;SO2-REGELUNG;5
The information for the data direction must be set to writing from values to Contronic to the value 1.
2.8.5 ConLink connection with ConVisa configuration data

If PGIM is used as successor of a ConVisa system, the existing configuration can be used. To edit the
signal information, the file "TransNet.lkc" created by ConVisa via a connection run is necessary. This
file includes all signal information required for connection. To evaluate the file, a utility program is
required. This utility program "lkc2conlink.exe" resides in
C:\PlantConnect.bin\scanner\ConlinkNT\Tools\Konfi_LKC\
The Transnet.lkc file is copied to the same folder.
The program is called as follows in a DOS box (On the taskbar, click the Start button, and then click
Run) :
C:\PlantConnect.bin\scanner\ConlinkNT\Tools\Konfi_LKC\lkc2conlink transnet.lkc [Enter]
In addition to Transnet.lkc and lkc2conlink.exe, the following files reside in the same subfolder:
Blockdef.dat
Conlinkx.ini
ConlinkServer.ini
Subfolder Line00 and Line01
(One subfolder per available interface)
Each of the subfolders includes a "Confi.txt" file with the signals to be connected via the respective
interface.
Now the created files are copied to the correct folders and the INI files will be customized.
File Blockdef.dat copy to ....\ConlinkNT\
File Conlinkx.ini copy to ....\ConlinkNT\
File ConlinkScanner.ini copy to ....\Konfi_ConlinkScanner\
Subfolder Line00 copy to ....\Konfi_ConlinkScanner
Subfolder Line01 copy to ....\Konfi_ConlinkScanner
The folder names Line00 and Line01 can be renamed arbitrarily. It is recommended to name the lines
according to the operator stations and channel numbers, for example ZLS1_K4. The name of the
subfolder will be part of the signal name in PGIM.
Settings of the INI files:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 78

PGIM 5
Conlinkx.ini
[CONLINK-LINE 1]
PORT=1
UNIT=1
SYSTEMTYPE=CK
SYSTEMVERSION=7
BAUDRATE=9600
STOPBIT=1
PARITY=ODD
BITS_PER_CHAR=8
TIMEOUT_QUIT=5000
TIMEOUT_ANSWER=10000
REPEAT_PROTOKOLL=5
EVENTBUFFER_SIZE=10
SHORTDOKU=KDVAX
BLOCKDEF=c:\conlinkserver\blockdef.dat ;Standard path C:\PlantConnect.Bin\scanner\conlinkNT\
blockdef.dat
[CONLINK-LINE 2]
PORT=2
UNIT=3
SYSTEMTYPE=CK
SYSTEMVERSION=7
BAUDRATE=9600
STOPBIT=1
PARITY=ODD
BITS_PER_CHAR=8
TIMEOUT_QUIT=5000
TIMEOUT_ANSWER=10000
REPEAT_PROTOKOLL=5
EVENTBUFFER_SIZE=10
SHORTDOKU=KDVAX
BLOCKDEF=c:\conlinkserver\blockdef.dat ;Standard path C:\PlantConnect.Bin\scanner\conlinkNT\ blockdef.dat
ConlinkScanner.ini
[ConlinkServer]
#Please customize path=
Path=c:\conlinkserver; Standard C:\PlantConnect.Bin\scanner\Konfi_ConlinkScanner
[CONLINK-LINE 1]
Name=Line 00 ; for example: ZLS1_K4
[CONLINK-LINE 2]
Name=Line 01 ; for example: ZLS3_K8
1KGD 400111 December 2006 79

PGIM 5
2.9 OPC-Client
2.9.1 Introduction
For the connection of PGIM to an OPC-Server DA (Data Access) according to the OPC-Specification
2.0 an OPC-Client must exist.
The OPC-Scanner is implemented by using the "Data Access Custom Interface Standard Version
2.04". The following interfaces are usable (if the OPC-Server supports this).
IOPCServer
IConnectionPointContainer
IOPCCommon
IOPCGroupStateMgt
IOPCASyncIO2
IOPCAsyncIO
IOPCItemMgt
IDataObject
Data transfer is exclusively event driven.
If the OPC-Scanner is installed on the same computer as the OPC-Server, you do not need the
configuration of the DCOM settings.
Known Installations
The following installation were successfully installed:
PGIM OPC-Scanner to IndustrialIT OperateIT Process Portal B (formerly Maestro NT)
PGIM OPC-Scanner to IndustrialIT ControlIT Process Portal F (formerly Freelance 2000)
PGIM OPC Scanner to ABB System 800xA
PGIM OPC-Scanner to IndustrialIT OperateIT Process Portal A (formerly Master Bus P280)
PGIM OPC-Scanner to SynoGate IP300 OPC with Teleperm ME
PGIM OPC-Scanner to WinCC with Siemens PCS
PGIM OPC-Scanner to Simatec with Siemens PCS
PGIM OPC-Scanner to SatLine
Methods of connection between OPC-Client and OPC-Server

It is possible to built up a communication in following two ways
Local
Means both components (OPC-Client and OPC-Server) are installed on the same PC.
Remote
Means the OPC-Client communicates via TCP-IP and DCOM with an OPC-Server, which is
installed on another PC, remotely.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 80

PGIM 5
PGIM PGIM PGIM
LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PGIM
OPC Client ScanDriver
OPC-Server of 3rd party system

LAN (TCP/IP)
reading/writing of
3rd party system
2.9.2 Prerequisites
The OPC-Server of the foreign System must be installed. Refer to the manufacturer‘s OPC
configuration.
If the OPC-Server is installed on another PC (Remote-OPC-Server), the following requirements are
needed:
A network connection to the PC, where the OPC-Server is running, must be established.
The Remote-OPC-Server must be known on the local PC (Windows-Registry).
2.9.3 Installation OPC-Scanner

During the installation the following folder structure is created:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_OPCScanner
In this folder two files are necessary for the configuration of communication.
OPCScanner.INI
CSV-file containing the signals named for example SIGNALS.CSV
1KGD 400111 December 2006 81

PGIM 5
2.9.4 Format of the file OPCScanner.INI

[PlaCoOPC] Section name is at the same time the ScanDriver name, which appears in the
scanner neighborhood
DelayTime = 0 Current time minus DelayTime (in seconds) is the current time-stamp of the
signal value. If the time-stamp is older than the DelayTime adjusted by the OPC
server, then the time-stamp is adapted. This adjustment is needed where OPC
servers do not supply current time-stamps for same signal values. In connection
with the on-line counter it is recommended to set a DelayTime. Default
adjustment is "0". In the case of DelayTime 0, the original time-stamp of the
OPC server is maintained.
RefreshDelay = 2 Time in seconds between the update of the OPC-lists (blocks)
UpDateRate = 0 Default value of the time in milliseconds as minimum actualization cycle of the
blocks. The OPC server will not offer the signals faster than the adjusted time.
Additionally for each signal in konfi.txt a cycle time can be assigned. Signals of
one cycle time are queried in an OPC-list (block). The adjustment "0" means that
the signals are updated with the maximum inquiry cycle.
OPCServerName = ABBMaestroNT.OPCServer Program ID of the OPC server, where this can be
determined. The name is assigned by the OPC
server manufacturer. It can also be determined with
the help of an OPC Client of program.
RedOPCServerName = ABBMaestroNT.OPCServer Program ID of the redundant OPC server,
where this can be determined. The name is
assigned by the OPC server manufacturer. It can
also be determined with the help of an OPC Client
of program. If no redundant OPC server is present
this entry remains empty
RemoteHost = deutaminw1215 Name of the computer where the OPC server is installed. If
the OPC server is locally installed the entry remains empty.
RedRemoteHost = deutaminw1232 Name of the computer where the redundant OPC server is
installed. If no redundant OPC server is present, or the
redundant OPC server is installed locally, the entry remains
empty.
VT_Empty If the data type of the reported item is VT_EMPTY, then the old value isn't
replaced with the result of VariantChange, which is always zero in this case.
2.9.5 Format konfi.txt

type;name;direction;longtext;MRS;MRE;units;statustext0;statustext1;unused;
OPCdatatype;updaterate(optional);aliasname(optional)
Example
Analog;ETH10CL001XJ01;READ;L Bettasche-Silo;0;13;m;;;;;2000;AliasName01
Analog;ETH31CW001XJ01;READ;L Flugasche-Bunker 1;0;600;t;;;;;3000;
Analog;ETH32CW001XJ01;READ;L Flugasche-Bunker 2;0;600;t;;;;;2500;
Analog;HHE21CL001XJ01;READ;L Kohle Bunker 1;0;22 ;m;;;;;2000;AliasName02
Analog;HHE21CL002XJ01;READ;L Kohle Bunker 2;0;22 ;m;;;;;;
Analog;HHE22CL001XJ01;READ;L Kohle Bunker 1;0;22 ;m;;;;;;
Analog;HHE22CL002XJ01;READ/WRITE;L Kohle Bunker 2;0;22 ;m;;;;;;
1KGD 400111 December 2006 82

PGIM 5
Analog;BAA00CE224XJ01;READ;SPG GEN-ABLTG BAA;0;12.6;KV;;;;;;
Binaer;M06NU02D010_XB01;READ;Abzugsschnecke Ein;;;;LOW;HIGH;;;;
Binaer;M06NU02D020_XB01;READ;Zuführungsschnecke Ein;;;;LOW;HIGH;;;;
Use the CSV-file to specify the signals that might be connected for the ScanDriver. The syntax
including upper and lower case must be followed strictly.
The "direction" READ or WRITE are both possible
The "unused" parameter is specified for reasons of compatibility to older versions. The entries do not
possess a function for this.
The "OPCdatatype" is registered in the case of the OPC connection with the WAGO system. The
appropriate signal processing maps are defined here. For more information refer to the "OPC-
Scanner at the WAGO I/O SYSTEM 750".
The "updaterate " parameter indicates the maximum speed the signal is to be updated. At the same
time signals are treated with same cycle time in the same OPC list (block).
The "aliasname" parameter can be used in the case of cryptic signal names from the OPC server into
standardized signal names for PGIM to change.
2.9.6 Start of the OPC-Scanner

The OPC-Scanner is started automatically by starting the PGIM ScanManager (under the assumption
that the respective ScanDriver DLL is located in the correct folder, and the configuration is done in the
right way). By starting the OPC-Scanner the OPC-Server is also started automatically. If the
ScanManager is stopped the OPC-Server is also stopped automatically.
The installed OPC-Server program can run as a program or as a service. To run the OPC-Server as a
program and not a Windows service you must be logged in under Windows. Therefore the
ScanManager must be started after the login of a Windows user.
Note that the Access Rights for the OPC-Client and –Server. Both must run with the same user
account.
2.9.7 Error Codes

// Values are 32 bit values laid out as follows:
//
// 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
// 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
// +---+-+-+-----------------------+-------------------------------+
// |Sev|C|R| Facility | Code |
// +---+-+-+-----------------------+-------------------------------+
// where
// Sev - is the severity code
// 00 - Success
// 01 - Informational
// 10 - Warning
// 11 - Error
// C - is the Customer code flag
// R - is a reserved bit
// Facility - is the facility code
// Code - is the facility's status code
//
1KGD 400111 December 2006 83

PGIM 5
// MessageId: OPC_E_INVALIDHANDLE 0xC0040001L
// MessageText: The value of the handle is invalid.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_BADTYPE 0xC0040004L
// MessageText: The server cannot convert the data between the
// requested data type and the canonical data type.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_PUBLIC 0xC0040005L
// MessageText: The requested operation cannot be done on a public group.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_BADRIGHTS 0xC0040006L
// MessageText: The Items Access Rights do not allow the operation.

//
// MessageId: OPC_E_UNKNOWNITEMID 0xC0040007L
// MessageText: The item is no longer available in the server address space
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_INVALIDITEMID 0xC0040008L
// MessageText: The item definition doesn't conform to the server's syntax.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_INVALIDFILTER 0xC0040009L
// MessageText: The filter string was not valid
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_UNKNOWNPATH 0xC004000AL
// MessageText: The item's access path is not known to the server.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_RANGE 0xC004000BL
// MessageText: The value was out of range.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_DUPLICATENAME 0xC004000CL
// MessageText: Duplicate name not allowed.
//
// MessageId: OPC_S_UNSUPPORTEDRATE 0x0004000DL
// MessageText: The server does not support the requested data rate
// but will use the closest available rate.
//
// MessageId: OPC_S_CLAMP 0x0004000EL
// MessageText: A value passed to WRITE was accepted but the output was clamped.
// MessageId: OPC_S_INUSE 0x0004000FL

// MessageText: The operation cannot be completed because the
// object still has references that exist.

//
// MessageId: OPC_E_INVALIDCONFIGFILE 0xC0040010L
// MessageText: The server's configuration file is an invalid format.
//
// MessageId: OPC_E_NOTFOUND 0xC0040011L
// MessageText: The server could not locate the requested object.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 84

PGIM 5
2.9.8 OPC-Scanner an Operate IT B

This configuration procedure must be followed regardless of whether Maestro NT OPC-Server and
PGIM OPC-Scanner (just called OPC-Client) are running on the same computer machine or not.
Running both applications on separate machines is the recommended installation method, in order to
avoid interference between installed Operate IT and PGIM components.
By default your OPC-Server machine is member of the Maestro NT domain (PDC) and your OPC-
Client machine is by default not within this NT domain (just a member of an ordinary workgroup). This
means that DCOM can not use NT security to determine who can talk to whom. Therefore, it will fall
back on the most basic of security models: the account(s) under which the client and a server running
must be valid and privileged on both machines.
That means that the server must have a user account defined that is the same as the user account on
the client machine under which the interface itself (PGIM ScanManager) will run as a service program.
The password for those two accounts must also be identical. Otherwise, DCOM will not pass any
communication between the client and the server. It can launch the OPC-Server, which may lead you
to falsely believe that you can to talk to the server from the client machine.
ABB has decided to use the service account called "OperateITService", sometimes also called
"OpITService", both with password "opit". Don’t forget to create this account on the OPC Client node
machine. We recommend that you create a copy of any existing administrative account.
Before continuing the OPC installation makes sure that:

• The additional network adapter on both nodes is installed.
• TCP/IP settings are complete.
• Host names are defined in respective host's files. (Use IP addresses from private address space).
Run Windows Explorer to map the installation folder of the OPC-Server on the remote node as a
network drive. Do a search for the following files:
SymOPCServer.exe
Opcproxy.dll
Opccomn_ps.dll
On the OPC-Client node create a folder structure like this:

"....\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\OPC\OperateIT_B\.."
Copy the above mentioned files here. Next register the OPC-Server in the Command window (On the
taskbar, click the Start button, and then click Run) as follows:
SymOPCServer.exe –regserver (to unregister use –unregserver)

This command creates unique Class and Application ID’s inside the local registry only. Both ID’s are
connected via the <GUID> (globally unique identifier, in this case {7DFB3F34 … 14175}.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 85

PGIM 5
You will need to create more entries. The following figures are just for informational purposes. Your
installation will be different.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 86

PGIM 5
Note: In the case of an Operate IT B update, the GUID may change. That means the client could not
communicate anymore with the OPC Server.
Make sure there is only one version of following DLL’s on your client machine. If there is more than
one, it should not be a problem if they are all same version. If they are not the same version, rename
all but the latest one, which you should keep in the \winnt\system32 folder.
regsvr32 Opcproxy.dll
regsvr32 Opccomn_ps.dll
The following dialog boxes should display:
DllRegisterServer in Opcproxy.dll succeeded.
DllRegisterServer in Opccomn_ps.dll succeeded.
Next invoke dcomcnfg by typing in the Command window (On the taskbar, click the Start button, and
then click Run) dcomcnfg.exe on the OPC Server machine. The following dialogs are displayed.
Select the OPC Server and click the Properties button.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 87

PGIM 5
If, as in this case, you are running the OPC Server and the Client on different nodes, select Run
application on this computer.
Then click the Security tab and make sure it is configured as follows:
Click Edit for Custom Access Permissions. Make sure that all of the following accounts are there.
Add the account with which the PGIM ScanManager, which starts up the OPC Client, is using. The
Type of Access should be, of course, Allow Access. Click OK and proceed with Launch
Permissions in same way.
Select the OPCEnum and click on the Properties button. Repeat the above-mentioned procedure
exactly the same way, including adding access to the account on which PGIM ScanManager is
running.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 88

PGIM 5
Finally, verify the following Default DCOM Configuration Properties. If required, modify the Default
Protocols accordingly. It is possible that your Default Authentication Level is different that what is
shown.
As you have may be noticed, no DCOM configuration settings are required on the machine where
OPC Client (PGIM ScanManager) is running.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 89

PGIM 5
Now you are ready to try connecting remotely to the OPC Server by using any Tool program described
later in this document.
You may need to reboot. However sometimes it will work without rebooting.
The following settings (OPC Scanner) are required to connect successfully to Operate IT B (formerly
Maestro NT):
OPCScanner.ini
[OPCScanner_1]
OPCServerTyp = Remote
RemoteHost = EE81SRV6
OPCServerName = ABBMaestroNT.OPCServer
UpDateRate = 0
2.9.9 Advant AC400 and Advant AC450

AC 400 and AC450 require a base 800xA system for connection to PGIM. Follow the rules within the
PGIM 800xA installation manual for configuration. Beside the base configuration the following
switches exist in for the AC400 OPC server: a multi-item, a combination of: VALUE and :ERROR if
type VT_AC400 is selected in the configuration file has been implemented.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 90

PGIM 5
2.9.10 Installation instructions for PGIM OPC-Scanner to AC800F

(formerly Freelance 2000)
Before continuing with the OPC installation make sure that the network connection to the AC800F bus
system, as well as to the configuration station (formerly called DIGI-Tool) is working properly. The
TCP/IP settings should be complete and the host names should be defined in their respective host
files.
Next, install the AC800F OPC Server as documented in the instruction manuals supplied with this
OPC Server. Make a note of the unique defined Resource-ID.
Upload all the required tags from the AC800F system to the OPC Server machine.
Next, install PGIM as licensed. Before you restart, edit the file OPCScanner.ini located in folder:
"....\PIMS\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi-OPCScanner\..."
For example:
Do not forget to insert the noted AC800F Resource-ID in the OPCServerName, separated by a dot.
Copy the previous prepared OPC tag list into the above-mentioned folder. If the name of this file
differs from "Demo.txt" either rename accordingly or modify the file OPCScanner.ini respectively.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 91

PGIM 5
1KGD 400111 December 2006 92

PGIM 5
2.9.11 OPC-Scanner on a WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750

The Scanner can work with the OPC-Server from WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH. It is possible to
connect the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 to PGIM.
The following components are possible:
Digital Inputs:
Typ 750-400 2-Canal DI, DC 24 V, 3,0 ms
Typ 750-405 2-Canal Digital Input, AC 230 V
Typ 750-406 2-Canal Digital Input, AC 120 V
Typ 750-408 4-Canal Digital Input, DC 24 V, 3,0 ms
Typ 750-415 4-Canal Digital Input, AC/DC 24 V, 20 ms
Analoge Input:
Typ 750-452 2 Canal Analog Input, 0-20 mA Diff
Typ 750-454 2 Canal Analog Input, 4-20 mA Diff
Typ 750-456 2 Canal Analog Input, +-10 V Diff
Typ 750-461 2 Canal Input Pt 100, RTD
Typ 750-462 2 Canal Input Thermo
Typ 750-465 2 Canal Analog Input, 0-20 mA single-ended
Typ 750-466 2 Canal Analog Input, 4-20 mA single-ended
Typ 750-467 2 Canal Analog Input, 0-10 V single-ended
Typ 750-468 4 Canal Analog Input, 0-10 V single-ended
Typ 750-469 2 Canal Eingang Thermo Drahtbruch
Typ 750-472 2 Canal Analog Input, 0-20 mA single-ended 16 Bit
Typ 750-474 2 Canal Analog Input, 4-20 mA single-ended 16 Bit
Typ 750-476 2 Canal Analog Input, DC +-10 V single-ended
Typ 750-478 2 Canal Analog Input, DC 0-10 V single-ended
The data in the analog inputs are given as raw values from the WAGO-OPC Server. The scaling is
done in the Scanner. For this to work properly in the signal configuration file the parameter "OPC-
Datentyp (VT_*)" must be set. For Example:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 93

PGIM 5
Binaer;WAGO_IO_TEST/00004_Value;READ;WAGO DO02;;;;;;;VT_BOOL;;
Analog;WAGO_IO_TEST/00005_Value;READ;WAGO AI01;0;10;;;;;VT_WAGO-750-467;;
The "OPC-Data type" parameters of the other analog inputs are similar.
The data in the analog values of the WAGO OPC server are raw values. These values must be
transferred by scaling. That scaling takes place in the scanner.
The binary signals are clearly and completely described in the ItemID. The VT_BOOL parameter is not
necessary.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 94

PGIM 5
2.9.12 OPC-Scanner on Siemens WinCC

The format of WinCC signals is not like the standard OPC in all cases. Adaptations are necessary.
These adaptations are contained in the signal configuration file.
The format of the signal configuration file is as follows:
Type; Signal; direction; description; MBA; MBE; Dimension; Status0; Status1; not used; not used;
Update Rate (optional); Alias name (optional);
For Example:
Binaer;Random.Boolean;READ;Random value.;;;;;;;;1000;Alias Name 01;
Analog;Saw-toothed Waves.Int1;READ/WRITE;Saw-toothed wave.;-100;100;;;;;;100;
The input in column 11 can set in WinCC Special format like the following example:
Analog;Saw-toothed Waves.UInt2;READ/WRITE;Saw-toothed wave.;0;2048;;;;;VT_WINCC0;;WinCC

0 Ramp
Analog;Saw-toothed Waves.UInt2;READ/WRITE;Saw-toothed
wave.;0;2048;;;;;VT_WINCC512;;WinCC 512 Ramp
VT_WINCC0 is set for conversion without offset and VT_WINCC512 for conversion with offset 512.
2.9.12.1 OPC Scanner specials for Simens S5/S7

On S5/S7 systems very often it is requested to have special data types with status information. These
have been implemented on the OPCScanner as the following:
VT_S5_4_20mA
With this multi-item signal a couple of other signals can be connected to one object. These
connections are fixed and can be managed by the column OPC Data type (xxx is a replacement for
the OPC-ItemId)
VT_AMME
This PGIM signal is a combination of xxx.Value, xxx.Timestamp and xxx.Quality.
VT_AMMEACK
This signal is a combination of Items xxx.Value, xxx.Timestamp and xxx.Quality. After receiving the
Items xxx.Timestamp and xxx.Quality will be set to 0.
VT_WINCC
The Signal will be build out of a combination of Items xxx.value and xxx.status..
VT_F_AI_TRT
This PGIM signal will be a combination from Items xxx/OUT, xxx/SWB, xxx/Pewa and xxx/SMR.
VT_F_C_ANA
This PGIM signal will be a combination from Items xxx/OUT und xxx/ERR.
VT_F_M_ANA
This signal will be a combination from Items xxx/IN, xxx/ERR, xxx/SL1, xxx/SL2, xxx/SL3 and xxx/SL4.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 95

PGIM 5
2.10 ABB PROCONTROL P14 (POS30)
2.10.1 Introduction
For the connection of PGIM to the ABB control system PROCONTROL P an XTC-ScanDriver is
available. It organizes the network communication with a PBS30 station of the PROCONTROL P
system.
At this time only the transfer of online data (read and write) is implemented.
PGIM PGIM PGIM

LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
XTC ScanDriver
PGIM
Reading / writing of
POS 30 LAN
XTC Interface
Stream Mode
PROCONTROL P Bus
2.10.2 Prerequisites PROCONTROL P

The communication between PGIM and PROCONTROL P uses the XTC-interface of the PBS30.
Therefore the XTC software, including the license, must be installed on the PBS30. For security
reasons (to avoid network problems inside the PROCONTROL network) PGIM is connected to the
PROCONTROL network using a configurable router. (Refer to the user guide for the data interface
XTC)
During the licensing of the XTC software it must to be taken into account that the PGIM Scanner uses
the so-called "stream mode" in order to achieve an event driven data transfer.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 96

PGIM 5
2.10.3 Installation XTC-Scanner

The PGIM XCT-ScanDriver creates the following folder structure during the installation:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_XTCScanner
In this folder a subfolder with the desired name of the ScanDriver must be created manually for
example "PBS30". Within this subfolder the following configuration files are expected to contain the
analog and binary signals to be read. The write direction is also possible, if you use the file "write.txt".
This file must contain signals, which are included in the "analog.csv or "binary.csv". Then the PGIM
ScanManager writes these signals to the PBS30.
Analog.csv
alphanumeric;longtext;MRS;MRE;dimension
50AP15E201XQ50; LEISTUNG HT;0,00;330,00;MW
50BA02E301XQ50; LEISTUNG SCHIENE BA/BB;0,00;30,00;MW
50BL05E301XQ50; LEISTUNG SCHIENE BL/BM;0,00;30,00;MW
50NA14T004XQ50;T SPEISEWASSER HI ECO 3;0,00;600,00;GRD C
50NA51T005XQ50;T DAMPF V HD-KUEHLER 1.1;0,00;600,00;GRD C
50NA52T005XQ50;T DAMPF V HD-KUEHLER 1.2;0,00;600,00;GRD C
Binary.csv
alphanumeric;longtext;coming;going
50NB40D010XA01; KESSELUMWAELZPUMPE;EIN;AUS
50NG00D010XA01; FRISCHLUFTGEBLAESE;EIN;AUS
50NG00D021XA01; OEL-PP1 FL-GEBLAESE;EIN;AUS
50NG00D022XA01; OEL-PP2 FL-GEBLAESE;EIN;AUS
Packedbool.csv
alphanumeric;longtext;datatype
HNA20 AS001 XC00;Checkb. cntr.FGD ind.drgt;23
HNA20 EA100 XA00;;19
HNB00 DP001 XR00;Checkback MST master cntr;22
HNB00 DU001 XR00;Checkback limit boil. 2+3;22
HNC01 AA001 XB00;;21
HNC01 AN001 XB00;;21
HNC01 AP001 XB00;Rückmeldungen;21
HNC01 AP002 XB00;Rückmeldungen;21
1KGD 400111 December 2006 97

PGIM 5
Packedboolmap.txt
Datatype;SKZ;Bit
19;XA21;15
19;XA22;14
19;XA08;12
19;XA40;11
19;XA05;10
19;XA01;9
19;XA02;8
19;XA43;7
19;XA06;5
19;XA07;4
19;XA48;3
19;XA42;2
19;XA44;1
19;XA41;0
20;XA40;11
20;XA01;10
20;XA97;9
20;XA98;8
20;XA43;7
20;XA95;6
20;XA96;5
20;XA93;4
20;XA94;3
20;XA91;2
20;XA92;1
21;XB21;15
21;XB22;14
21;XB31;13
21;XB32;12
21;XB40;11
21;XB91;9
21;XB92;8
21;XB43;7
21;XB46;6
21;XB01;5
21;XB02;4
21;XB45;3
21;XB42;2
1KGD 400111 December 2006 98

PGIM 5
21;XB44;1
21;XB41;0
22;XR07;13
22;XR41;12
22;XR40;11
22;XR02;10
22;XR05;9
22;XR06;8
22;XR44;1
23;XC21;15
23;XC22;14
23;XC31;13
23;XC32;12
23;XC40;11
23;XR02;10
23;XR05;9
23;XR06;8
23;XC43;7
23;XC46;6
23;XC01;5
23;XC02;4
23;XC45;3
23;XC42;2
23;XC44;1
23;XC41;0
Write.txt
# Signal name
#
50NA14T004XQ50
50NA51T005XQ50
50NA52T005XQ50
50NG00D021XA01
The PGIM ScanManager gets all event-driven measured values from the PBS30. The configuration
files "analog.csv" und "binary.csv" are used to select the desired signals for the measured values
which must be send via the PGIM ScanManager to the PGIM database.
Configuring the back-signals is made by the files packedbool.csv and packedboolmap.txt. In the file
packedbool.csv the allocation of a signal to a data type takes place. This serves then as code into the
file packedboolmap.txt, from which then the bit locations and signal flags of the single bits come out.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 99

PGIM 5
2.10.4 XTCScanner.ini
Appropriate INI-files can be stored in ....\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\Konfi_XTCScanner. The following
entries are possible:
[PBS30]
TimeSync = 1 time synchronization via XTC interface; 1=on 0=off
SnapShotCycle = 300 additionally cyclic request in seconds or 0 for no cyclic request
TimestampDelay = 120
#[PBS30-XTC 2] additional PBS30 Gateways
The entry TimestampDelay can control cyclic updating of the time-stamps in the XTC scanner.
The cyclic updating operates in a similar manner as the virtual ScanDriver, however the data source is
the PBS.
2.10.5 Network Configuration at PGIM side

For the connection of the PGIM PC to the PBS30 station pure TCP/IP is used. The PGIM Scanner
must be able to reach the PBS30 station via its node name PBS30 (see the ScanDriver name). If no
name server is available within the network, the name PBS30 must be defined inside the file "hosts"
on the PGIM Scanner PC.
Depending on the network structure the definition of a separate route from the PGIM Scanner PC to
the PBS30 station may be necessary. To define a separate route procedure contact your network or
Windows system administrator.
For Example:
The first network card of the PC is connected to the office network via the default gateway
The second network card is used for the connection of the PBS30 via a separate LAN-Router
2.10.6 Start of the XTC-Scanners

The XTC-Scanner is started by starting the PGIM ScanManager. The XTC-Scanner is implemented
completely as a Windows service.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 100

PGIM 5
2.11 ABB Symphony Maestro-UX
2.11.1 Introduction
Apart from the Symphony-ScanDriver (P-Protokoll-ScanDriver; O-Net, Melody, OperateIT B0/B1), a
connection can be established between the Maestro workstation and PGIM so that data is returned to
the control system. Current data can also be obtained from Symphony-Maestro.
As a physical interface, a network connection between the PGIM-PC and the BLE network is used.
The plant management level network is Ethernet with TCP/IP protocol. (See the Symphony
configuration)
PGIM
PGIM PGIM
Client
Client Client
LAN (TCP/IP)
LAN (TCP/IP) PGIM
Symphony
reading/writing of
current values
Symphony Maestro-UX
Operator Station
reading of process
values from history
LAN (TCP/IP)/BLEnet
In a CSO workstation, the following Ethernet ports can be installed:

1. CSO-Net: This card is integrated on the CPU board and designated as LAN0.
2. X-Net: Here an additional card is required to be installed on the VME bus; it is designated as
NAT0.
3. CM-Net: Here, too, an additional card is required to be installed on the VME bus; it is
designated as NAT1.
On the Maestro workstation, the basic software must have been installed so that the services of
Maestro can be utilized via the CSO network. Also the licenses for the CSO-API must be available.
The communication between a Maestro workstation and a PGIM server or scanner PC is performed
via TCP/IP protocol.
The interface program NetAPISrv can receive data via the network, which will be interpreted and
converted into API C++ calls. After that, the interface program returns the result to the calling client.
In PGIM, the Maestro-UX connection is performed via a logic line.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 101

PGIM 5
For the communication between Maestro and the PGIM ScanDriver, settings are required.
2.11.2 Installation on a PGIM PC

On the computer where the PGIM ScanManager has been installed, the corresponding ScanDriver will
also be installed. By selecting the correct ScanDriver in the user-defined installation (ScanDriver
Maestro-UX) of PGIM, the following subfolder is created:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ScanDriver
The folders listed here contain the drivers for the respective connections.
The Symphony ScanDriver is listed here with the name MUXScanner. It communicates via the
Maestro workstation (BLE-Net). In the subfolder "ScanDriver", the driver DLL "muxscanner.dll" is
included.
2.11.3 Configuration on a PGIM PC

In addition to the appropriate driver, a configuration file is required which provides the PGIM system
with all necessary information on the signals that are in the Symphony control system.
In the set up system, the configuration file "Confi.txt" resides in the folder
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_MUXScanner\
The configuration file includes all information on the signals which can be connected. The most
important ones are signal name (KKS or AKS), long text, dimension, measuring range start and end. If
changes are made in the control system, it may be necessary to update the configuration file.
The configuration file is similar to the file for the PProtScanner (see the example under PProtScanner).
Moreover, the configuration for the Maestro-UX scanner includes all local flags, which are known in
Maestro. Later on, these flags will be obtained or described by PGIM.
In the file %WINNT%\system32\drivers\etc\services the following entry must be added:
cso_01 5001/tcp
In the folder ....\PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\Konfi_MUXScanner a file can exist called
"MUXScanner.ini". In it relevant communication information is described.
For Example:
[Redundancy]
# Redundancy pair for the WSR1
WSR1 = WSR3
2.11.4 Updating of the Confi.txt configuration file

The configuration file "Confi.txt" is based on the archive file "ArcFile" created in Maestro. This file is
created automatically when Maestro objects are archived (see the Maestro configuration). To create a
Confi.txt file, the program "ArcFile" is available in:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\ArcFile\
This will create a configuration automatically.
When reinstalling the system, a few settings must be customized. The file "Makearc.cmd" must be
opened with an editor (for example Notepad), and the following settings must be changed:
Contents of the original file Makearc.cmd:
c:
cd \PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\ArcFile
1KGD 400111 December 2006 102

PGIM 5
ftp -n -s:getarc.ftp >NUL
arcfile_m arcfile
Set the correct drive and path if it differs from the standard:
For Example: d:
arcfile_m arcfile
In the file "getarc.ftp", the Maestro workstation must be indicated with its network name (Also refer to
the host file on the PGIM PC) and the path where the file ArcFile exists on the Maestro workstation.
Contents of the original file getarc.ftp:
open ws1
user pml pml
cd /usr/contronic/appl/Zov
asc
get ArcFile
quit
Indicate the correct workstation and path:
For Example: open demo1 (Workstation name = demo1)
user pml pml
cd /usr/contronic/appl/Zov (Standard path)
asc
get ArcFile
quit
The program is started by selecting the file "getarc.ftp" with the mouse in the Windows explorer and
dragging it to the file "Makearc.cmd".
After the start of the program, a DOS box will be opened automatically showing that the ArcFile is
retrieved via ftp from the Maestro workstation. Then a configuration file is filtered. When the process
has been concluded, a file with the name "config.txt" resides in the ArcFile folder. This file can be
copied to the folder:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\ Konfi_MUXScanner\
The ScanDriver does not recognize that a new configuration file is available. In order to update the
changes the ScanManager must be restarted and in the PGIM database, the changed signals must be
retrieved again from the scanner environment into the database (see the SignalExplorer –
Configuration balancing).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 103

PGIM 5
2.11.5 Installation on the Maestro-UX workstation
2.11.5.1 Maestro environment and UNIX

For the configuration in Maestro or HP-UX, either a console (ASCII terminal) or an HPTERM (terminal
in HP-UX) is required.
By selecting the "Wrench" symbol in the "Global menu" of "Sys", the Maestro system dialog is opened.
By clicking on the menu item:
Plant management level
Accessories
Terminal
An HPTERM will be opened if none is open as yet. Only one HPTERM can be opened in this way.
From this HPTERM, an arbitrary number of further HP terminals can be opened with the following
command:
hpterm -sb -name <terminalname> &
-sb = scroll bar
-name = initiates the indication of a name for the terminal
& = opens another window
For example hpterm -sb -name BLE &
Or with the command:
Term
Now the necessary entries can be made in the new terminal.
For Example:
ll list long Indication of files and folders in the long form
ll *.dat
mkdir make folder Creates a folder
mkdir temp
rmdir remove folder Deletes a folder
rmdir temp
rm remove Deletes files
rm *.old
cd change folder Changes to a folder
cd temp
1KGD 400111 December 2006 104

PGIM 5
2.11.5.2 Installation of the "NETAPI" software on the Maestro-UX

workstation
Requirements:
For the installation, the following file is required:
....\PlantConnect.bin\PlaCoArc\Install\Pexall.tar
The file Pexall.tar is transferred via FTP (binary file transfer) from the PC to the workstation.
For example with workstation demo01

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C:\>ftp demo01
Connected to demo01.
220 demo01 FTP server (Version 1.7.193.3 Thu Jul 22 18:32:22 GMT 1993) ready.
User (demo01:(none)): pml
331 Password required for pml.
Password:
230 User pml logged in.
ftp> lcd c:\plantconnect.bin\placoarc\install
Local folder now C:\plantconnect.bin\placoarc\install
ftp> bin
200 Type set to I.
ftp> put pexall.tar
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for Pexall.tar.
226 Transfer complete.
194560 bytes sent in 0,25 seconds (778,24 Kbytes/sec)
ftp> quit
221 Goodbye.
C:\>
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Check the tar file on the workstation with tar -tvf and
unpack the packed file with tar -xvf.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
12 [pml] demo01:/users/pml: ll
total 400
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 194560 Jan 19 17:18 Pexall.tar
13 [pml] demo01:/users/pml: tar -tvf Pexall.tar
14 [pml] demo01:/users/pml: tar -xvf Pexall.tar
1KGD 400111 December 2006 105

PGIM 5
15 [pml] demo01:/users/pml: ll
total 404
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 194560 Jan 19 17:18 Pexall.tar
drwxr-xr-x 2 pml pss 1024 Jan 19 17:22 netapi
16 [pml] wsr03:/users/pml:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Create links (symbolic links) to the subfolders so that, later on, the folder ../users/pml/netapi can be
called from each folder using /NETAPI and the folder ../users/pml/mux2placo via /MUX2PLACO.
The command pwd indicates the current folder. The creation of links must be performed from the root.
For NETAPI:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18 [pml] demo01:/: su
# pwd
/
# ln -s /users/pml/netapi /NETAPI
# exit
19 [pml] demo01:/:
19 [pml] demo01:/: cd /NETAPI
20 [pml] demo01:/users/pml/netapi: ll
total 30
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 7133 Dec 9 17:17 OPL_APPL_TASK01.Normal
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 1953 Dec 9 17:23 OPL_APPL_TASK01.lists
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 1434 Dec 14 18:11 netapistart
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 1359 Oct 22 10:12 netapistart_pex
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 728 Apr 10 1997 netapistop
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 29 Dec 9 16:53 t
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For MUX2PLACO:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
18 [pml] demo01:/: su
# pwd
/
# ln -s /users/pml/mux2placo /MUX2PLACO
# exit
19 [pml] demo01:/:
19 [pml] demo01:/: cd /MUX2PLACO
20 [pml] demo01:/users/pml/mux2placo:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1KGD 400111 December 2006 106

PGIM 5
To process the communication, a service number must be entered in the file Services. The Services
file resides in the /etc folder. As superuser su, the file can be edited with the vi editor. Since the
service to be entered has the number 5001, a place in ascending order is selected in the Services file.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
21 [pml] demo01:/users/pml/netapi: cd /etc
22 [pml] demo01:/etc: su
# vi services
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Example of a Services file before it has been changed for PGIM

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#
lansrm 570/udp # SRM/UX Server
DAServer 987/tcp # SQL distributed access
instl_boots 1067/udp # installation bootstrap protocol server
instl_bootc 1068/udp # installation bootstrap protocol client
rlb 1260/tcp # remote loopback diagnostic
nft 1536/tcp # NS network file transfer
pmlockd 1889/tcp # SynerVision locking daemon
pmlockd 1889/udp #
nfsd 2049/udp # NFS remote file system
netdist 2106/tcp # update(1m) network distribution service
rfa 4672/tcp # NS remote file access
lanmgrx.osB 5696/tcp # LAN Manager/X for B.00.00 OfficeShare
hcserver 5710/tcp # HP Cooperative Services
grmd 5999/tcp # graphics resource manager
spc 6111/tcp # sub-process control
iasqlsvr 7489/tcp # Information Access
recserv 7815/tcp # SharedX Receiver Service
#
# Kerberos (Project Athena/MIT) services
#
klogin 543/tcp # Kerberos rlogin -kfall
kshell 544/tcp krcmd # Kerberos remote shell -kfall
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Example of a Services file after it has been changed for PGIM

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
pmlockd 1889/udp #
nfsd 2049/udp # NFS remote file system
netdist 2106/tcp # update(1m) network distribution service
rfa 4672/tcp # NS remote file access
lanmgrx.osB 5696/tcp # LAN Manager/X for B.00.00 OfficeShare
1KGD 400111 December 2006 107

PGIM 5
hcserver 5710/tcp # HP Cooperative Services
grmd 5999/tcp # graphics resource manager
spc 6111/tcp # sub-process control
iasqlsvr 7489/tcp # Information Access
#
# These services are required for PGIM ...
# H&B 19.1.1999
CSO_01 5001/tcp # PGIM MUX_Scanner

CSO_25 5025/tcp # PGIM PlaCoArc
#
#
klogin 543/tcp # Kerberos rlogin -kfall
kshell 544/tcp krcmd # Kerberos remote shell -kfall
ekshell 545/tcp krcmd # Kerberos encrypted remote shell -kfall
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
You can quit the vi editor with the command :wq!.

The OPL* files from the folder /NETAPI (symbolic link) are copied to the folder /usr/contronic/config
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
29 [pml] demo01:/usr/contronic/admin: cd /NETAPI
30 [pml] demo01:/users/pml/netapi: ll
total 30
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 1434 Dec 14 18:11 netapistart
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 1359 Oct 22 10:12 netapistart_pex
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 728 Apr 10 1997 netapistop
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 29 Dec 9 16:53 t
31 [pml] wsr03:/users/pml/netapi: cp OPL* /usr/contronic/config
32 [pml] wsr03:/users/pml/netapi: ll /usr/contronic/config/OPL*
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 7133 Jan 19 17:43 /usr/contronic/config/OPL_
APPL_TASK01.Normal
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 1953 Jan 19 17:43 /usr/contronic/config/OPL_
APPL_TASK01.lists
-rw-rw-r-- 1 pj72 pss 5675 Jun 5 1997 /usr/contronic/config/OPL_
DSPL_TASK00.Normal
-rw-rw-r-- 1 pj72 pss 1908 May 6 1996 /usr/contronic/config/OPL_
DSPL_TASK00.lists
33 [pml] wsr03:/users/pml/netapi:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1KGD 400111 December 2006 108

PGIM 5
To initiate the automatic start when the workstation is started, a software package must be installed in
Maestro. Typically, the PML base is reinstalled. After that, the program has been established and will
start automatically.
The program can be started manually from the folder /NETAPI using netapistart. To check this, the
program t can be called with cat t.
You must enter these instructions:
Telnet < workstation name>
pml
pml
CD /NETAPI
t
This procedure checks whether the process still runs netapisrv. If it runs, then everything is clear.
If not, then stop the program with the "Terminate APIM TA01" command and start with "Start APIM
TA01".
1KGD 400111 December 2006 109

PGIM 5
2.12 ABB Symphony PProtocol (Onet, Melody, OperateIT B0/B1)
2.12.1 Introduction
The Symphony control system by ABB can be connected in two different ways. A fast and high-
capacity interface is set up via the P-Protocol-ScanDriver. As a physical interface, a network
connection between the PGIM PC and a CCO star coupler (see Symphony configuration) is used.
PGIM PGIM PGIM

LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PProtocol ScanDriver
PGIM
Symphony
LAN (TCP/IP)
Operator Station reading / writing of

Onet (PProtocol)
CCO20, CCO30, CCU, CMC70
2.12.2 Installation
On the computer where the PGIM ScanManager has been installed, the corresponding ScanDriver will
also be installed. By selecting the correct ScanDriver in the user-defined installation of PGIM, the
following subfolder is created:
The folders listed here include the drivers for the respective connections.
The Symphony ScanDriver is listed here with the name PProt-Scanner because it communicates via
the P-Protocol of the Symphony-Operation-Network. In the subfolder "PProtScanner", the driver DLL
"pprotscanner.dll" is included.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 110

PGIM 5
2.12.3 Configuration
In addition to the appropriate driver, a configuration file is required which provides the PGIM system
with all necessary information on the signals that are available in the Symphony control system.
In the set up system, the configuration file "Pconnect.txt" resides in the folder:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_PprotScanner\
The configuration file includes all information on the signals which can be connected. The most
important ones are signal name (KKS or AKS), long text, dimension, measuring range start and end. If
changes are made in the control system, it may be necessary to update the configuration file.
An example of a configuration file:
#name;type;selektor;skz;comi;;mba;mbe;itxt;otxt;dimtext;kurztext;langtext;anlagenbereich;datatype;Aliasname
31MBA40EE010;$CSCBIN3;I1;XA01;ep121g09;;;;Ein;Ein;;31MBA00;TS Abblaseklappen;GT 31MBA00;31;Alias001
31MBA40EE010;$CSCBIN3;I2;XA02;ep121g09;;;;Aus;Aus;;31MBA00;TS Abblaseklappen;GT 31MBA00;31
31MBL20EE010;$CSCBIN3;I1;XA02;ep121g09;;;;Aus;Aus;;31MBA00;TS Klappe Luftansaugung;GT 31MBA00;31
31MBP01EC001X;$CSCBIN13;I1;XA11;ep121g09;;;;>LFZ;>LFZ;;31MBP00;UGS Erdgasversorgung;GT 31MBP00;31
31MBV01EC001;$CSCSFC;I4;XA11;ep121g09;;;;>LFZ;>LFZ;;31MBV00;UGS Ölverso/WelDreh;GT 31MBV00;31
40HAD00EB100;$CECOA;I1;XA64;ep029a29;;;;Soll<Ist;Soll<Ist;;40HAD00;UmsLogik Regelkessel 1-3;RK 40HAD00;31
40HAD00EB100;$CECOA;I2;XA66;ep029a29;;;;Soll>Ist;Soll>Ist;;40HAD00;UmsLogik Regelkessel 1-3;RK 40HAD00;31
2.12.4 Pconnect.txt configuration file from Maestro UX

The configuration file "Pconnect.txt" is based on the archive file "ArcFile" created in Maestro. This file
is created automatically when Maestro objects are archived (see the Maestro configuration). To create
a Pconnect.txt file, a program is available in:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\ArcFile\
This will create a configuration file automatically.
When reinstalling the system, a few settings must be customized. The file "Makearc.cmd" must be
opened with an editor (for example Notepad), and the following settings must be changed:
Contents of the original file Makearc.cmd:
c:
arcfile arcfile
Set the correct drive and path if it differs from the standard:
For Example: d:
arcfile arcfile
In the file "getarc.ftp", the Maestro workstation must be indicated with its network name (Also refer to
the host file on the PGIM PC) and the path where the ArcFile exists on the Maestro workstation.
Contents of the original file getarc.ftp:
open ws1
user pml pml
1KGD 400111 December 2006 111

PGIM 5
cd /usr/contronic/appl/Zov
asc
get ArcFile
quit
Indicate the correct workstation and path:

For Example: open demo1 (Workstation name = demo1)
user pml pml
cd /usr/contronic/appl/Zov (Standard path)
asc
get ArcFile
quit
The program is started by selecting the file "getarc.ftp" with the mouse in the Windows explorer and
dragging it to the file "Makearc.cmd".
After the start of the program, a DOS box will be opened automatically showing where the ArcFile is
retrieved via ftp from the Maestro workstation. Then a configuration file is filtered. When the process
has been concluded, a file with the name "config.txt" resides in the ArcFile folder. Please remind to
add the optional aliasnames after this step. This file must be renamed into Pconnect.txt; then it can be
copied to the folder:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_PProtScanner\
The ScanDriver recognizes on its own that a new configuration file is available and updates the
acquisition. In order to update the changes in the PGIM database also, the changed signals must be
retrieved again from the scanner environment, and copied to the database (see the SignalExplorer –
Configuration balancing).
2.12.5 Pconnect.txt configuration file from OperateIT B0/B1

The information needed for the "pconnect.txt" configuration file is in the SQL-Server database. With a
SQL-Script (PlantConnectKonfi.sql) it is possible to get all this information out of database. The
convert program ConV_MNT_PlaCo.exe creates the pconnect.txt file you need for the PGIM
ScanDriver configuration. Please remind to add the optional aliasnames after this step.
- SQL Script . <PlantConnectKonfi.sql>

- Converter program for PConnect.txt <ConV_MNT_PlaCo.exe>
- Shortcut combines the functions
- Folder ...PlantConnect.bin\Tools\OPITB\
2.12.6 Pprotscanner.ini (Packed Boolean Telegrams)

The Pprotscanner.ini file includes additional settings for handling exceptional cases.
[Pathnames]
Konfi = C:\Programme\Simulation\RtdbFiles
[Packed Bool]
UseBits = 0x00000003
1KGD 400111 December 2006 112

PGIM 5
Pathnames
In Pathnames, the path for the configuration file is indicated.
Packed Bool
If the entry is commented out, all 32 bits of the telegram are listed as single binary values in PGIM. To
limit the amount of signals to the relevant signals, a bit pattern can be indicated in hexadecimal
notation which filters out the required bits from the Packed Boolean telegram.
For Example: 10LAB20AP001/ZB91

UseBits = 0x00000003 means 00000000000000000000000000000011 converted to binary.
In this case the bits 1 and 2 are available as binary values in the scanner environment of PGIM.
UseBits = 0x0000F456 means 00000000000000001111010001010110 converted to binary.
In this case the bits 2, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 14, 15, and 16 are available as binary values in the scanner
environment of PGIM.
The name of the Packed Boolean word with the appendix of the bit is assigned as a signal name to
the binary signals.
For Example: 10LAB20AP001/ZB91/00 10LAB20AP001/ZB91/01 10LAB20AP001/ZB91/02
The meaning of the different bits depends on the control system used. This can be found in the
respective configuration.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 113

PGIM 5
2.13 ASCII-File
2.13.1 Introduction
The ASCII-Import-ScanDriver imports measured values for different signals from one or several files.
With the function OVERWRITEHIST, the measured values are written directly into the database,
bypassing the ScanManager. The configuration of the signals is performed via a configuration file
where the information on the signals is available. The measured values reside in a value file, which is
evaluated and deleted after the import of the measured values.
PGIM PGIM PGIM

LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PGIM
ASCII ScanDriver
Remote System
reading of current / historical
File Transfer
of ASCII Files process values
LAN (TCP/IP)
Remote System FTP

NFS
Windows drive mapping
2.13.2 Installation
By selecting the ASCII-ScanDriver in the user-defined installation of PGIM, the following subfolder will
be created:
The ASCII-ScanDriver is listed here with the name ASCIIScanner.DLL.
In addition to the driver, one or several configuration files are required to provide all the necessary
information on the available signals to the PGIM system.
In the set up system, this configuration folder exists:
C:\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_ASCIIScanner\
Lower-level folders are interpreted as logic ScanDrivers, where the folder name corresponds to the
ScanDriver name.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 114

PGIM 5
This folder must include two other folders. The first folder is called KONFI where two files exist,
namely the ScanDriver configuration file ASCIISCANNER.INI and the signal configuration file
KONFI.CSV.
The most important entry of the ScanDriver configuration file is the name of the PGIM database server
to which the measured values shall be transmitted via OVERWRITEHIST.
For Example:
[MAIN]
Server = MIP311
Here the values are transmitted to the database server with the host name MIP311.
Another entry can be the name of the value file from which the measured values are to be read. This
entry is optional. If no entry exists, the file WERTE.CSV is searched by default in the folder WERTE.
For Example:
[MAIN]
Wertefile = \PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Werte_ASCIIScanner\BSP_ASC\Werte.csv
2.13.4 Structure of the signal configuration file KONFI.CSV

Structure of a configuration spreadsheet:
Column B: Signal name to be displayed for this signal in PGIM (KKS, AKS, arbitrary)
Column C: Direction; Direction as seen from PGIM (READ)
Column E: Long text; Descriptive text for the signal
Column F: MBA; Measuring range start
Column G: MBE; Measuring range end
Column H: Dimension; Dimension of the signal
Column I: Status 0; Status text OFF for binary signals
Column J: Status 1; Status text ON for binary signals
Column K: Factor a of the conversion function y=ax+b Default: 1.0
Column L: Factor b of the conversion function y=ax+b Default: 0.0
Column M: | Mark for column end
An example of a Konfi_Datei (configuration file) is available in C:\PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\
Konfi_ASCIIScanner\
2.13.5 Structure of the measured value file WERTE.CSV

The division of the WERTE.CSV file is preset. There must always be 5 columns and 4 semicolons as
separators between the columns in one line. If the first character is a semicolon, this line is regarded
as a comment line and will not be evaluated.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 115

PGIM 5
The file includes a value list where one line includes the measured value for one signal. The
information is separated by a semicolon (;).
The following condition applies: The values for a signal must be available in the file in ascending
chronological order. But it is not absolutely necessary that the measured values for one signal exist in
one block. If signals are not listed in chronological order, those measured values which are not
indicated in the correct sequence will be rejected.
The signal list includes the following information.

Column A Signal name
o The following conditions apply:
o Maximum length of the signal name: 255 characters.
o The following characters must not occur
Semicolon (;)
Comma
Quotation marks
Backslash
Asterisk
Blank in front of the signal name
Blank at the end of the signal name
Column B Time stamp
o If no valid entry exists, the entry will be rejected completely.
Column C Measured value
o Maximum length: 100 characters.
o If no valid entry exists, the last value will be written and the status set to &H4 (invalid).
Column D Status
o If no valid entry exists, the status will be set to &H4 (invalid).
o Permissible values are 0-255 (see status bits in PGIM in the Short instruction – Signal
explorer)
Column E Time identifier
o Possible entries:
o No entry The time-stamp is available as UTC time.

o S The time-stamp is available as local summer time.
o W The time-stamp is available as local winter time.
For Example:
;#class modul application;09.12.98 11:16:31
;#SignalKey;TimeStamp;Value;Status;FlagSommerWinterzeit
1LAB10CT001 XJ01;01.11.1998 08:50:00.100;1,2; 0;W
1LAB10CT001 XJ01;01.11.1998 09:20:00.020;2,5; 0;W
1KGD 400111 December 2006 116

PGIM 5
1LAB10CT001 XJ01;01.11.1998 09:50:00.003;2,6; 0;W
1LAB10CT001 XJ01;01.11.1998 09:50:00.003;1,0; 0;W
1LAB10CT001 XJ01;01.11.1998 10:20:00.400;1,6;100;W
1KGD 400111 December 2006 117

PGIM 5
2.14 ASCII Online Scanner
2.14.1 Introduction
The difference between the AsciiScanner and the AsciiOnlineScanner is that the AsciiOnlineScanner
is much faster than the AsciiScanner. The restriction to the AsciiScanner is that the
AsciiOnlineScanner can not overwrite values in the database.
Two files are important for the AsciiOnlineScanner. The value file and the signal configuration file.
PGIM PGIM PGIM
LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PGIM
ASCII OnlineScanDriver
Remote System
reading of current / historical
File Transfer
of ASCII Files process values
LAN (TCP/IP)
Remote System FTP

NFS
Windows drive mapping
2.14.2 Value file

An example of the AsciiOnlineScanner ASCII-Format:
werte.csv
#SignalKey;TimeStamp;Value;Status;FlagSommerWinterzeit
LSTWKGES_Z21;01.07.2002 08:50:00.100;1,2;0;W
LPREAGES_Z21;01.07.2002 09:20:00.020;2,5;0;S
206_G_____ZW_P;01.07.2002 09:50:00.003;2,6;0;
OSBEG_WETTWISK;01.07.2002 10:20:00.400;1,6;0;
CISCO SYSTEMS, INC. 07 ac 01;01.07.2002 10:50:00.050;1;0;
LSTWKGES_Z21;01.07.2002 10:50:00.100;1,2;0;W
OSBEG_WETTWISK;01.07.2002 10:51:01.000;1,6;0;
1KGD 400111 December 2006 118

PGIM 5
LPREAGES_Z21;01.07.2002 11:52:00.000;2,5;0;S
ABB can adjust each ASCII format for the AsciiOnlineScanner on request.
2.14.3 Signal Configuration

The signal configuration file Konfi.csv must be located in the folder:
Konfi_AsciiOnlineScanner\FreeName\Konfi\Konfi.csv.
2.14.3.1 Build up of the signal configuration file KONFI.CSV

The structure of a configuration spreadsheet:

Column B: Signal name to be displayed for this signal in PGIM (KKS, AKS, arbitrary)
Column C: Direction; Direction as seen from PGIM (READ)
Column E: Long text; Descriptive text for the signal
Column F: MBA; Measuring range start
Column G: MBE; Measuring range end
Column H: Dimension; Dimension of the signal
Column I: Status 0; Status text OFF for binary signals
Column J: Status 1; Status text ON for binary signals
Column K: Factor a of the conversion function y=ax+b Default: 1.0
Column L: Factor b of the conversion function y=ax+b Default: 0.0
Column M: Alias-Name, exchange name for the signal name
An example of a Konfi_Datei (configuration file) is available in C:\PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\
Konfi_ASCIIScanner\
Type; Name; Direction; Description; MBA; MBE; Dimension; Status text OFF; Status text ON; a; b;
Alias name;
2.14.4 Configuration file ASCIIOnlineScanner.ini

The behavior of the data logging can be set with the parameters in the ASCIIOnlineScanner.ini file.
Each instance of the scanner requires a section in that file.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 119

PGIM 5
In this section different settings can be done:
Valuefile
ValueFileFormat
Separator
DeleteAfterRead
EndOfLineChar
FTPServer
FTPUser
FTPPasswd
Pollcycle
RelStarttime
Explanation:
Valuefile
Name of the value file. If this information missing, the file
Konfi_AsciiOnlineScanner\FreeName\werte.csv is active.
Wildcards (? and *) are allowed in the file name. In the case of wildcards the files which are included
will be imported in sorted order.
For Example:
Valuefile = E:\PIMS\Scanner\Konfi_AsciiOnlineScanner\52756\GAS\EM_01.TXT
ValueFileFormat
Designate the parser to be used. If this information missing, the standard format is used.
Separator
Designate the separator to be used. If this information missing, the standard format Semicolon is
used.
For Example:
Separator = :
Separator = |
DeleteAfterRead
Here you can define that the file should be deleted after reading. Possible inputs are true or false. If
this information missing, the file will be not be deleted.
For Example:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 120

PGIM 5
DeleteAfterRead = true
DeleteAfterRead = false
EndOfLineChar
Define the character in use for the end-of-line information. This information can be in decimal or hex
notation. If this information missing the character 0x0d (13) is active.
For Example:
EndOfLineChar = 0x0a
EndOfLineChar = 0x0d
FTPServer
If this entry is defined, the value files are read from a server with the ftp. At the same time this
parameter must also define the entries for ftp user and FTP Password. This entry does not have a
default value.
For Example:
FTPServer = unixserver1
FTPUser and FTPPasswd

Defines the account which can be used for the ftp connection. These entries do not have a default
value.
For Example:
FTPUser = user1
FTPPasswd = XXXX
Pollcycle
Define the cycle rate to search for files if no notification by the operating system is possible. The cycle
rate is indicated in seconds. If the entry is missing, then 60 seconds are used.
For Example:
Pollcycle = 60
RelStarttime
Defines a point of reference for the polling cycle. This allows you to look every 8 minutes after the full
hour for files. If the entry is missing, then midnight is used
For Example:
RelStarttime = 00:08:00
1KGD 400111 December 2006 121

PGIM 5
2.15 Teleperm-XP
2.15.1 Introduction
For the connection between PGIM and the control system Teleperm-XP from Siemens a separate
driver is available that allows you to read process data from the Teleperm-XP system and write values
from PGIM to the Teleperm-XP system. The PGIM Scanner TXP/XU is connected to the TXP/XU
gateway from Siemens.
PGIM PGIM PGIM
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PGIM
TXPXU ScanDriver
reading / writing of
current process values Siemens
Network (TCP/IP)
TXP-XU
Terminal Bus
2.15.2 Installation
For the installation of the TXP/XU Scanner a network connection to the TXP/XU gateway from
Siemens must be established. The PGIM database may be located either on the same PC as the
TXP/XU Scanner or on a different one connected via an additional network card. The PGIM Scanner-
PC is able to buffer the incoming data in case the network connection to the PGIM Server that stores
the data is disturbed.
The PGIM ScanManager with the TXP/XU ScanDriver is installed on the PC. This PC is connected on
one side to the TXP/XU gateway station by a crossover cable. This is a direct connection between the
first network card of the PGIM Scanner PC and the network card of the TXP/XU gateway. The
connection of the PGIM Scanner to the PGIM Server is established using a second network card
The PGIM Scanner directly reads the values from the TXP/XU gateway. Values from PGIM to the
TXP/XU gateway station are written by a cyclic file transfer (with a cycle rate of approximately 5
seconds) to both redundant TXP process station "PUa" and "PUb".
If the network connection between the PGIM Scanner and the PGIM Server is lost, the scanner stores
the values read from the TXP/XU gateway on the local hard disk (buffering of the scanner data)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 122

PGIM 5
The PGIM TXP/XU -ScanDriver creates the following folder structure during the installation:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_TXPXUScanner
example "PBS30". Within this subfolder the following configuration files are expected to contain the
analog and binary signals to be read.
Each subfolder is interpreted as the name of a gateway station, for example
PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\Konfi_TXPXUScanner\h01xu1
The name "h01xu1" is used as the name of a connected gateway station. This name must be
configured as an IP address, either by a name server or in the file "hosts" of the Scanner PC. The
command "ping" with the name "h01xu1" must be successful. Both these files are created at the
Siemens system and transferred to the Scanner PC by FTP.
In the subfolder "h01xu1" two files are located named "descr.txt" and "Signal2.txt". Both files together
describe all signals that can be read by this Scanner.
If values must be written to the Siemens system, two additional files named "analog_write.txt" and
"binary_write.txt" are necessary. Inside these two additional files the signals to which values must be
written are defined.
The file "TXPXUScanner.ini" must exist in the folder
"PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\Konfi_TXPXUScanner". In this file the relevant information for the
communication is specified.
For Example:
[h01xu1]
# separator in the file Signal2.txt (this file contains the scaling information)
Seperator = |
# In general two gateway stations (XU) could exist, but this is not tested
Redundancy =
# ID for the communication with the XU, value defined during configuration of XU
ClientID = 10
# Name (IP-adress) of the process stations (PU)s, two which the write files must # be
transferred. The PU can be redundant, therefore two entries
ProcessUnit1 = pu35a
ProcessUnit2 = pu35b
# Username and password for the FTP connection
FTPUser = user
FTPPassword = password
# Name of the write files
WriteFileAnalog = analog.dat
WriteFileBinary = binary.dat
Explanation:
Lines starting with the character "#" are comments.
[h01xu1]: Name of the section in the ini-file. This must be the same as the name of the gateway
station (XU). The parameters for the respective scanner are defined in this section.
Separator: Separator of the columns in the file "Signal2.txt" that contains the scaling information.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 123

PGIM 5
Redundancy: If a redundant XU is available this redundant XU may be defined here. (This function is
not tested due to missing test equipment.)
ClientID: ID of the Scanner used for the login at the XU. This value is defined during the
configuration of the XU.
The following lines are only necessary if data must be written to the XU.
ProcessUnit1: Name of a Process Unit (PU), to which data shall to be written.

This name must be configured as an IP address, either by a name server or in
the file "hosts" of the Scanner PC. The command "ping" with the name "h01xu1"
must be successful.
ProcessUnit2: Necessary for redundant Process Stations. The name of the redundant PU to
which data shall to be written. Concerning the name the above mentioned
naming requirement is also valid for this parameter.
FTPUser: The writing of the data is done via a FTP connection to the PU(s). In this line the
FTP user must be defined.
FTPPassword: The password for the defined user must be specified here.
WriteFileAnalog: Because the writing of data works by files the name of the file for the analog
signals must be defined. The amount of signals that can be written is limited to
100 analog and binary signals.
WriteFileBinary: The same as for analog signals.
All the configuration files are generated within the TXP system. These files must be obtained from the
customer.
The following configuration files are needed:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_TXPXUScanner\ha_xu1\
analog_write.txt
binary_write.txt
descr.txt
Signal2.txt
The file "analog_write.txt" contains the analog signals to be written:

analog_write.txt
# Signalname;Dimension; MBA; MBE; Langtext
TESTSIGNAL01 VXA;%;-10.0;110.0;Langtext zu TESTSIGNAL01
TESTSIGNAL02 VXA;bar;0.0;1.0;Langtext zu TESTSIGNAL02
The file "binary _write.txt" contains the binary signals to be written:

binary_write.txt
# Signalname; Eintext; Austext; Langtext
TESTSIGNAL01 VXZ;ein;aus;Langtext zu TESTSIGNAL01
TESTSIGNAL02 VXZ;ein;aus;Langtext zu TESTSIGNAL02
1KGD 400111 December 2006 124

PGIM 5
The file "descr.txt" contains information concerning the signals to be read. The measuring ranges of
the signals are missing in this file. Therefore an additional file (Signal2.txt) is required.
- descr.txt
# Descriptionfile XU
# 06.12.1999 08:15:18
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TAG/INSTRUMENT TAG: 000300430001
00 MR00 M001 XB01 K1 Bl. B Leinhäuser Weg
Point Type: D
Zero / Span: 0/1
--- No value ---
--- Platzhalter 1 ---
--------------------------------------------------------------------
00 WS01 M001 XQ01 Windgeschwindigkeit
Point Type: R/S
Zero / Span: 0,5 49,5
Engineering units: m/s
--------------------------------------------------------------------
00 WS02 M002 XQ01 Lufttemperatur
Point Type: R/S
Zero / Span: -30 100
Engineering units: °C
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TAG/INSTRUMENT TAG: 0003005C0001
00 MR00 M001 XG01 K1 Bl. B Leinhäuser Weg
Point Type: D
Zero / Span: 0/1
--- No value ---
--------------------------------------------------------------------
00 MR15 M000 XB11 Pförtner OS-Umschaltung
Point Type: D
Zero / Span: 0/1
1KGD 400111 December 2006 125

PGIM 5
--- No value ---
--------------------------------------------------------------------
00 MR00 U001 XA01 TS Quittung Alarm
Point Type: D
Zero / Span: 0/1
--- No value ---
--------------------------------------------------------------------
TAG/INSTRUMENT TAG: 0003031D0001
16 DT11 U001 ZM81 Klimaanlage Stö
Point Type: D
Zero / Span: 0/1
--- No value ---
--------------------------------------------------------------------
The file "Signal2.txt" forms an addition to the file "descr.txt" and contains the measuring ranges of the
different signals. The last column in the file "Signal2.txt" is not needed for the connection. The file is
delivered by Siemens.
- Signal2.txt
00 AZ01 E801 |XE01 | -400 | 400 | 1
00 AZ01 E802 |XE01 | -400 | 400 | 1
00 ES01 E001 |XQ02 | 0 | 50 | 100
00 ES01 E001 |XQ01 | 0 | 50 | 0.5
00 ES01 M001 |XQ01 | 0 | 120 | 100
00 HW05 U950 |XQ01 | 0 | 20000 | 1
00 HW05 U957 |XQ01 | 0 | 20000 | 1
00 VC65 F001 |XQ01 | 0 | 300 | 1667
00 VC65 P001 |XL01 | 0 | 2.0 | 500
00 VC65 P001 |XQ01 | 0 | 2 | 100
00 WS01 M001 |XQ01 | 0.5 | 50 | 500
The PGIM TXP/XU Scanner uses the following DLL as the ScanDriver:
....\PlantConnect.Bin\Scanner\ ScanDriver\TXPXUScanner.dll
1KGD 400111 December 2006 126

PGIM 5
2.16 ABB Symphony Harmony (Infi 90)
2.16.1 Introduction
For the connection between PGIM and the Harmony control system a separate driver is available that
allows you to read process data from the Harmony system. The PGIM Scanner INFI90 is connected to
the Harmony network communication coupler using the semAPI Software (see the picture below).
The PGIM INFI90 Scanner therefore requires:
• The SemAPI Run-time kit Version 2.1, to be installed on the PC where the PGIM INFI90 Scanner
is running including the license for data acquisition (DA)
PGIM PGIM PGIM

LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager PGIM
INFI90 ScanDriver
sem API
Harmony
reading and writing of INFI90
RS 232 C current process values
or SCSI
INICI03
Interface
CNET
• The supported interface on the Harmony side. Currently only the INICI03 interface is tested and
supported.
2.16.2 Installation
For the installation of the PGIM INFI90 Scanner a RS-232-c or SCSI connection to the INICI03
interface must be established. The PGIM database may be located either on the same PC as the
INFI90 Scanner or on a different one connected via an additional network card. The PGIM Scanner-
PC is able to buffer the incoming data in case the network connection to the PGIM Server that stores
the data is disturbed.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 127

PGIM 5
2.16.3 Structure
On the PC the PGIM ScanManager with the INFI90 ScanDriver is installed. The INFI90 ScanDriver
uses the semAPI client function library. It gets the process values from the INICI03 Interface via a
device driver. The connection of the PGIM Scanner to the PGIM Server either uses local TCP/IP (if the
PGIM server is installed on the same PC as the ScanManager) or network TCP/IP.
Structure:
PGIM PC
PGIM Server
Local TCP/IP
PGIM ScanManager
INFI 90 ScanDriver
semAPI software
SemAPI client function library Device driver

Local TCP/IP
RS-232-C
Interface INICIO3
If the network connection between the PGIM Scanner and the PGIM Server is lost, the scanner stores
the values read by the INFI90 ScanDriver on the local hard disk (buffering of the scanner data)
In PGIM there are two types of INFI90 Scanners possible.

In the case of a new installation you should take type 2. This type allows more detailed information
from the INFI90 System. The difference between the two types is that they make different Signal
names available. That is the reason why you should take type 1 in the case of an existing installation.
Otherwise you get new signal names, and the signal names used in the past will be different than the
future signal names.
The PGIM INFI90-ScanDriver creates the following folder structure during the installation:
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Konfi_INFI90Scanner
example "INFI90".
Every subfolder is read by the driver and the name is used as a ScanDriver names, for example:
....\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\Konfi_Infi90Scanner\INFI90
Results in a ScanDriver named INFI90.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 128

PGIM 5
The connection between a ScanDriver (for example INFI90) and the semAPI is done by the INI-File
"INFI90Scanner.ini" in the base path:
...\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\Konfi_Infi90Scanner\INFI90\INFI90Scanner.ini
The structure of this file is as follows
[INFI90]
LogICI = 1
TimeSync = 0
EstablishDelay = 50
OnlineStart = 1
ExceptionReportScreening=1
Explanation:
The Scanner expects, for historical reasons, 11 columns, but ignores the last 3.
The ScanDriver name is used as the section name. The entry must be equal to the subfolder
name
The key „LogICI" corresponds to the settings of the Application Logical ICI in the ICICONF
program. Possible values are „1" up to „20".
If the key „TimeSync" is set to 1 then the INFI90 ScanDriver synchronizes the computer clock
to the INFI90 system. Possible values are „0" or „1".
The key "EstablishDelay". Here you set the time in milliseconds between two function calls
"s_establish_import_point_w"
The key "OnlineStart" defines the startup mode for the function s_ici_restart_w. Default 0 (DISABLE)
The key "ExceptionReportScreening" can be set as a parameter for the function "s_ici_restart_w".
Default 0 (DISABLE).
The folder .\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\Konfi_Infi90Scanner\INFI90 contains one or more files which

describes the tags available by the ScanDriver. The filenames are fixed, currently used are:
analog.txt
digital.txt
rcm.txt
rmsc.txt
station.txt
dd.txt
AnalogReport.txt
daang.txt
digitalReport.txt
msdd.txt
The structure of the files is as follows:

• For the files „digital.txt" and „rcm.txt":
1KGD 400111 December 2006 129

PGIM 5
Tag type;direction;tag name;tag description;units;lower range value; upper range value;connection
address
For Example:
bin; read; IX100; switch motor feedwaterpump; ON; OFF;1223334444
Remark:
• The entries in the first and second column are fixed.
• The entry in the column "tagname" must be unique for all tags read via the INFI90 Scanner.
• For the files "analog.txt", "rmsc.txt" and "station.txt"

Tag type;direction;tag name;tag description;units;lower range value; upper range value;connection
address
For Example:
ana; read; TC100; temperature after superheater; DegC; 300.0; 600.0;102030004
Remark:
• The entries in the first and second column are fixed.
• The entry in the column "tagname" must be unique for all tags read via the INFI90 Scanner.
The connection address is based on four parts:

• the loop number (L: 1 digit),
• the control unit (or node) number (U: 2 digits),
• the control module number (M: 2 digits) and
• the block number (B:4 digits)
This leads to the following format (filled with leading zeroes if necessary):
LUUMMBBBB
For example:
102030004
The ScanDriver log file is written in the folder

.\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\Log\Infi90Scanner\Infi90Scanner.log
And
.\PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\Log\Infi90Scanner\Infi90Scanner.log.old
There is no way to mark a line as comment.

The description for rcm.txt should read "Tag type;direction;tag name;tag description;state text
low;state text high;connection address"
The content of “DigitalReport.txt” is nearly the same as the one for "digital.txt", the difference is one
added column for the pointindex which is used by the SemAPI for the write access.
The description for DigitalReport.txt should read "Tag type;direction;tag name;tag
description;state text low;state text high;connection address;pointindex"
1KGD 400111 December 2006 130

PGIM 5
You can activate the desired function in the INFI90Scanner.ini file:
[ProcessVariable]
[SetPoint]
[ControlPoint]
[RatioIndex]
[Analog]
[StationStatus]
[Digital]
[SetPointOutput]
[ControlOutput]
[RatioIndexWritten]
[StationMode]
[AnalogReport]
[DigitalReport]
[ModuleStatus]
[RCM]
[RCMReport]
[StationReport]
[RMSC]
[RMSCReport]
[Station]
[Real4AnalogRead]
[Real4AnalogReport]
[ExtendedModuleStatus]
[EnhancedTrend]
[DAANG]
[AsciiString]
[MSDD]
[DD]
[RMC]
[DADIG]
[TextSelector]
[HarmonyAnalogInput]
[HarmonyAnalogOutput]
[HarmonyDigitalInput]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 131

PGIM 5
[HarmonyDigitalOutput]
[PhaseX]
Example of a INFI90Scanner.ini:
[INFI90]
LogICI = 1
TimeSync = 0
EstablishDelay = 50
OnlineStart = 1
ExceptionReportScreening=1
[ProcessVariable]
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
# calibration correction values
CCV = 0
[SetPoint]
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[ControlPoint]
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
1KGD 400111 December 2006 132

PGIM 5
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[RatioIndex]
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[Analog]
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 1
# limit alarm
LA = 1
# deviation alarm
DA = 1
# points red tagged
RT = 1
# point tracking
PT = 1
CCV = 1
[StationStatus]
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# process variable quality
PVQ = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# set point tracking
1KGD 400111 December 2006 133

PGIM 5
SPT = 0
# bypassed
BYP = 0
# manual interlock
MI = 0
# output tracking
OT = 0
# digital station failure
DSF = 0
# computer OK signal
COK = 0
# control level
LEV = 0
# cascade/ratio control strategy
CRN = 0
# automatic/manual mode
AM = 0
[Digital]
# quality
Q = 1
# limit alarm
LA = 1
# value
V = 1
[SetPointOutput]
#
F_VALUE = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[ControlOutput]
#
F_VALUE = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
1KGD 400111 December 2006 134

PGIM 5
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[RatioIndexWritten]
#
F_VALUE = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[StationMode]
#
UC_STATION_MODE = 0
[AnalogReport]
#
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[DigitalReport]
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# value
V = 1
[ModuleStatus]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 135

PGIM 5
F_VALUE = 0
[RCM]
# quality
Q = 1
# alarm
ALM = 1
# tagged
TAG = 1
# output value
OV = 1
# logic set input received
SI = 1
# set permissive input received
SP = 1
# logic reset input received
RI = 1
# override
OR = 1
# feedback
FB = 1
# set command received
SC = 1
# reset command received
RC = 1
[RCMReport]
# quality
Q = 0
# alarm
ALM = 0
# tagged
TAG = 0
# output value
OV = 0
# logic set input received
SI = 0
# set permissive input received
SP = 0
# logic reset input received
RI = 0
# override
OR = 0
# feedback
FB = 0
# set command received
SC = 0
# reset command received
RC = 0
[StationReport]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 136

PGIM 5
# process_variable_value
PV = 0
# set_point_value
SP = 0
# control_output_value
CO = 0
# ratio_index_value
RI = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
PVQ = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
SPT = 0
# bypassed
BYP = 0
# manual interlock
MI = 0
# output tracking
OT = 0
DSF = 0
COK = 0
# control level
LEV = 0
CRN = 0
AM = 0
[RMSC]
#
F_VALUE = 1
# quality
Q = 1
# limit alarm
LA = 1
# deviation alarm
DA = 1
# points red tagged
RT = 1
# point tracking
PT = 1
1KGD 400111 December 2006 137

PGIM 5
CCV = 1
[RMSCReport]
#
F_VALUE = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[Station]
# process_variable_value
PV = 1
# set_point_value
SP = 1
# control_output_value
CO = 1
# ratio_index_value
RI = 1
# quality
Q = 1
# limit alarm
LA = 1
# deviation alarm
DA = 1
PVQ = 1
# points red tagged
RT = 1
SPT = 1
# bypassed
BYP = 1
# manual interlock
MI = 1
# output tracking
OT = 1
DSF = 1
COK = 1
# control level
LEV = 1
1KGD 400111 December 2006 138

PGIM 5
CRN = 1
AM = 1
[Real4AnalogRead]
#
F_VALUE = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[Real4AnalogReport]
#
F_VALUE = 0
# quality
Q = 0
# limit alarm
LA = 0
# deviation alarm
DA = 0
# points red tagged
RT = 0
# point tracking
PT = 0
CCV = 0
[ExtendedModuleStatus]
#
F_VALUE = 0
[EnhancedTrend]
# maximum reporting time exceeded
MXT = 0
# request for immediate notification
IMM = 0
# message size limitation exceeded
MSG = 0
# enhnaced trend block in alarm
ALM = 0
# quality
1KGD 400111 December 2006 139

PGIM 5
Q = 0
# sequence number
NUM = 0
[DAANG]
# quality
Q = 1
# high alarm
HA = 1
# low alarm
LA = 1
# alarm level
AL = 1
#
X = 1
# block red tagged
TAG1 = 1
# auto/manual
AM1 = 1
#
UC_BYTE2 = 1
# constant value 1
CONSTANT_1 = 1
# block red tagged
TAG3 = 1
# hardware fault/bad quality of input signal
FQ3 = 1
# out of range
OR = 1
# limited
LIM = 1
# auto/manual
AM3 = 1
# calculated value
CAL3 = 1
# qualtiy override
QO = 1
# off scan/no report
SS = 1
# high deviation alarm
HDA = 1
# low deviation alarm
LDA = 1
# high rate
HR = 1
# low rate
LR = 1
# variable alarms
VA = 1
# alarm suppression indication
ASI = 1
1KGD 400111 December 2006 140

PGIM 5
# in realarm
RA = 1
# permit input select
PIS = 1
# constraints enabled
CE = 1
# calculated value
CAL5 = 1
# hardware fault/bad quality of input signal
FQ5 = 1
# multilevel alarming
MA = 1
# auto/manaul
AM5 = 1
#
F_OUTPUT_VALUE = 1
#
F_HIGHER_LIMIT = 1
#
F_LOWER_LIMIT = 1
[AsciiString]
#
UC_CLASS = 0
#
UC_FORMAT = 0
#
UC_STATUS_SIZE = 0
#
UC_DATA_SIZE = 0
[MSDD]
# quality
Q = 1
# multistate device driver block alarm
ALM = 1
# status override value
SOR = 1
# control override value
COR = 1
# operating mode
M = 1
# block tagged
TAG = 1
# command output equal
CO = 1
# feedback state 1
FB1 = 1
# feedback state 2
FB2 = 1
# feedback state 3
1KGD 400111 December 2006 141

PGIM 5
FB3 = 1
# feedback state 4
FB4 = 1
# good state table value
GS = 1
# requested state
RS = 1
[DD]
# quality
Q = 1
# device driver block alarm
ALM = 1
# device driver block tagged
TAG = 1
# output value
OV = 1
# feedback state 1
FB1 = 1
# feedback state 2
FB2 = 1
# feedbak status
FS = 1
# override value
OR = 1
# operationg mode
MODE = 1
[RMC]
# quality
Q = 0
# rmc block in alarm
ALM = 0
# feedback state 1
FB1 = 0
# feedback state 2
FB2 = 0
# rmc block tagged
TAG = 0
# output value
OV = 0
# bad start
BS = 0
# fault
F = 0
# start permissive state 1
SP1 = 0
# start permissive state 2
SP2 = 0
# error codes for bad start
RMC_ERR = 0
1KGD 400111 December 2006 142

PGIM 5
[DADIG]
# quality
Q = 0
# dadig block alarm
ALM = 0
# time in alarm re-alarm (bit is toggled)
REALM = 0
# alarms suppressed
SUP = 0
# output suspect
OS = 0
# point off scan (no report)
NR = 0
# red tagged
TAG = 0
# output value
OV = 0
# extended status transition latched
LAT = 0
# quality override
QO = 0
# set permissive
SP = 0
# primary input selected
PI = 0
# alternate input selected
AI = 0
[TextSelector]
#
C_COLOR_NUMBER = 0
#
C_BLINK = 0
#
L_MESSAGE_NUMBER = 0
# quality
Q = 0
[HarmonyAnalogInput]
#
UC_FORMAT = 0
#
UC_STATUS_SIZE = 0
#
UC_DATA_SIZE = 0
#
F_DATA = 0
# value quality (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_Q = 0
# value is in high alarm (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_H_ALRM = 0
# value is in low alarm (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 143

PGIM 5
UC_L_ALRM = 0
# status errors are inhibited (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_SEI = 0
# simulated value (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_SIM = 0
# overridden value (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_OE = 0
# value is suspect (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_SUSP = 0
# is quality propogated (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_PQ = 0
# extended range (valid if range = 11; 0 = overdriven low 1 = overdriven high)
UC_ER = 0
# configuration error exists (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_CERR = 0
# channel condition (range: 00 = OK, 01 = open, 10 = short, 11 = overdrive)
UC_RANGE = 0
# readback status (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_RBST = 0
# reference status (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_REF = 0
# calibration status (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_CAL = 0
[HarmonyAnalogOutput]
#
UC_FORMAT = 0
#
UC_STATUS_SIZE = 0
#
UC_DATA_SIZE = 0
#
F_DATA = 0
UC_Q = 0
# value is in high alarm (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_H_ALRM = 0
# value is in low alarm (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_L_ALRM = 0
# status errors are inhibited (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_SEI = 0
UC_SIM = 0
UC_OE = 0
UC_SUSP = 0
UC_PQ = 0
# extended range (valid if range = 11; 0 = overdriven low 1 = overdriven high)
UC_ER = 0
1KGD 400111 December 2006 144

PGIM 5
UC_CERR = 0
UC_RANGE = 0
# readback status (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_RBST = 0
# reference status (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_REF = 0
# calibration status (0 = OK; 1 = BAD)
UC_CAL = 0
[HarmonyDigitalInput]
#
UC_FORMAT = 0
#
UC_STATUS_SIZE = 0
#
UC_DATA_SIZE = 0
UC_Q = 0
# value is in alarm (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_ALM = 0
# status error are inhibited (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_SEI = 0
UC_SIM = 0
UC_OVVL = 0
UC_SUSP = 0
UC_PQ = 0
UC_CERR = 0
UC_RANGE = 0
# readback status (0 = OK; 1 - BAD)
UC_RBST = 0
# value
UC_VAL = 0
[HarmonyDigitalOutput]
#
UC_FORMAT = 0
#
UC_STATUS_SIZE = 0
#
UC_DATA_SIZE = 0
UC_Q = 0
# value is in alarm (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 145

PGIM 5
UC_ALM = 0
# status error are inhibited (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_SEI = 0
UC_SIM = 0
UC_OVVL = 0
UC_SUSP = 0
UC_PQ = 0
UC_CERR = 0
UC_RANGE = 0
# readback status (0 = OK; 1 - BAD)
UC_RBST = 0
# value
UC_VAL = 0
[PhaseX]
#
UC_FORMAT = 0
#
UC_STATUS_SIZE = 0
#
UC_DATA_SIZE = 0
#
UC_XRP_REVISION = 0
#
US_SLOW_EVENT_COUNTER = 0
#
US_FAST_EVENT_COUNTER = 0
#
F_FAULT_CODE = 0
#
F_FAULT_DATA = 0
#
S_STATE = 0
#
S_PHASE_NUMBER = 0
UC_Q = 0
# alarm status(level) (1 = user messages (future), 2 = user faults, 3 = system faults)
UC_ALM = 0
# XR confirmation (0 = not expected, 1 = expected)
UC_CNFXR = 0
# program status (0 = inactive, 1 = active)
UC_PROG = 0
# acquired status (0 = not acquired, 1 = acquired)
UC_ACQ = 0
1KGD 400111 December 2006 146

PGIM 5
# red tag status (0 = no red tags, 1 = one or more red tags set)
UC_RTG = 0
# sequence mode (0 = normal, 1 = sequence mode)
UC_SEQ = 0
# LEAD PHASEX block (0 = NO; 1 = YES)
UC_LEAD = 0
# step execution mode (0 = normal, 1 = step execution commanded by Debugger)
UC_DBGSTP = 0
1KGD 400111 December 2006 147

PGIM 5
2.17 ABB ConDas
2.17.1 Introduction
PGIM PGIM PGIM

LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
ConDas ScanDriver PGIM
LAN (TCP/IP) ConDas
reading/writing of
current values
ConDas Server
TCP/IP Server
2.17.2 Shortconfiguration
2.17.2.1 Introduction
To connect ConDas as a data supplier for ABB PGIM, a signal list (short configuration procedure) from
ConDas is required. This list is created by the ConDas program:
MED:SHORTDOCUMENTATION.EXE
This is a text file which will be transmitted, for example via FTP, to the PGIM system. In a short
configuration procedure, signals from several ConDas configurations may be combined, provided that
configuration-wide unique short names are used.
The program SHORTDOCUMENTATION is included in the distribution of ConDas version 7.71 and
higher, but it can also be used without any problem on previous ConDas versions 7.x.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 148

PGIM 5
2.17.2.2 Creation of Short Documentation

The program SHORTDOCUMENTATION, for the creation of a short configuration procedure, can be
executed from the DCL prompt of OpenVMS using the command:
RUN MED:SHORTDOCUMENTATION
Alternatively, you may also integrate it into ConDas as an external program, setting the sequence
mode to "Foreground".
The program has a simple user interface. After the start, the following outputs are displayed (the parts
in italics are examples; you can provide your own inputs):
SHORTDOCUMENTATION V1.0 (c) PDV-SYSTEME 2001
This program creates a short configuration from one or more configurations and writes it to an output
file.
First, the program requests that you enter a file name for the text file in which the short configuration
procedure will be created. You can use any name. In the case of an empty input, the program will
abort.
Enter the output file name [no default] : MWF:KDOK.GDB
Then enter a number for the configuration whose signals are to be included in the short configuration
procedure. All signals of the configuration are always documented.
Enter the configuration number [no default] : 1
After the selected configuration has been read and processed, you may either include another
configuration in the short configuration procedure, or terminate the inputs and then create the short
Do you want to add another configuration [Y/N] ? N
If "N" is entered, the short configuration procedure will be created in the selected file.
By entering "Y" or "J", you can include another configuration in the short configuration procedure. The
same configuration can not be selected a second time.
The signal names of the configurations included in the short configuration procedure are checked for
their configuration-wide uniqueness, i.e., each signal name may exist only once in the short
configuration procedure. If an infringement of this rule is detected, the program indicates the signal
name and removes the associated configuration completely from the short configuration procedure:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 149

PGIM 5
*** Duplicate tag name (#1) : STD
*** Error adding signal #1.
Configuration processed with error(s).

Do you want to continue anyway [Y/N] ? N
You can choose two possibilities: either you enter "N" to abort the program because of the error, or
you enter "Y" or "J" to ignore the error and have the short configuration procedure created for the
remaining configurations. You can also include other configurations.
After the program has created the short configuration procedure, it indicates the name of the file and
the number of documented signals:
Short configuration written to file mwf:kdok.gdb

(89 signals)
Press ENTER to finish...
Press ENTER to terminate the program.
2.17.2.3 Structure of Short Documentation

The format of the text file with the short configuration procedure is based on the format of the .GDB
files of Intellution® FIX® 7.0.
The file begins with a five-line header which includes date and time of the creation, as well as the
node name of the ConDas computer.
!-------------------------------------------------------
! Short configuration of 9-MAY-2001 14:40:00.80
! Nodename: AXPSW
!
!-------------------------------------------------------
The parameters of the signals follow in separate text blocks which are separated from each other by a
blank line. Each text block begins with a two-line header, followed by a blank line. Then the parameter
block follows indented by 2 blank spaces. It is composed of a different number of lines depending on
the signal type.
Type :: AI
Tag Name :: 01LAB01CP901/X1/SIG
DESCRIPTION :: 01LAB01CP901/X1/SIG
EGU TAG :: Grad C
LOW EGU LIMIT :: 0,0
HIGH EGU LIMIT :: 100,0
1KGD 400111 December 2006 150

PGIM 5
Each line includes a keyword for the parameter, which is separated by 2 colons from the following
proper parameter value. The table below lists all keywords used at present and their meaning:
Keyword K/P1 Meaning
Type K Signal type:
AI = Analog Input
AO = Analog Output
DI = Digital Input
DO = Digital Output
Note: All signal types of ConDas are mapped

onto these 4 types.
Tag Name K Name of the signal (short name)
DESCRIPTION P Description of the signal (long text)
EGU TAG P Unit of measure (dimension) of the signal

(not for digital signals)
LOW EGU LIMIT P Measuring range start2 of the signal

HIGH EGU LIMIT P Measuring range end2 of the signal

OPEN TAG P Text for the off condition of the signal

(only for digital signals)
CLOSE TAG P Text for the on condition of the signal

(only for digital signals)
1
K/P: Use of keyword (K = header, P = parameter block)
2
Measuring range: Signals from ConDas without specific measuring range (for example virtual
channels) get the measuring range 0..100.
2.17.2.3.1 Example of a short configuration procedure
1KGD 400111 December 2006 151

PGIM 5
!-------------------------------------------------------
! Short configuration of 9-MAY-2001 14:40:00.80
! Nodename: AXPSW
!
!-------------------------------------------------------
Type :: AI
Tag Name :: 01LAB01CP901/X1/SIG
DESCRIPTION :: 01LAB01CP901/X1/SIG
EGU TAG :: Grad C
LOW EGU LIMIT :: 0,0
HIGH EGU LIMIT :: 100,0
Type :: DI
Tag Name :: 10AE00E007/VXA
DESCRIPTION :: 10AE00E007/VXA
OPEN TAG :: 0
CLOSE TAG :: 1
2.17.3 The GDB File

In the case of the ScanDriver for ConDas, the definition of the signals to be processed is performed
via a .GDB file which can be created in the ConDas system using the "SHORTDOCUMENTATION"
tool (Refer to the "Short Documentation for ABB PGIM" section of this manual).
For each ConDas system, a...\Confi_ConDasScanner\<ConDas-System> folder must exist. The first
.GDB file found in this folder will be read. It will check whether the system name in the header of the
file is identical to the folder name.
The following fields from the .GDB file are evaluated for each signal:
Type
Type of the signal:
AI,CI,VI,EX,HN => analog/read
AO,CO,MA => analog/read-write
DI => binary/read
DO => binary/read-write
Only these types are evaluated, signals of other types will be ignored.
Tag Name
Name of the signal
DESCRIPTION
1KGD 400111 December 2006 152

PGIM 5
Description of the signal (long text)
For binary signals (ConDas types DI, DO), the following evaluations are additionally performed:
OPEN TAG
Status text for signal value 0 (status text "Off")
CLOSE TAG
Status text for signal value 1 (status text "On")
For analog signals (ConDas types AI,AO,CI,CO,VI,EX,HN,MA), the following evaluations are
additionally performed:
LOW EGU LIMIT

Measuring range start of the signal (MBA)
HIGH EGU LIMIT

Measuring range end of the signal (MBE)
EGU TAG
Dimension of the measured values of the signal
2.17.4 The ConDasScanner.ini Control File
The ConDasScanner.ini control file is created in the folder ...\Confi_ConDasScanner\. The file
includes one section for the configuration of the ConDasScanner as well as one or several sections for
the configuration of the ConDas systems.
For each ConDas system, one section [<ConDas-System>] may exist where
the <ConDas-System> must not be identical with "ConDasScanner". The name must correspond with
the name in the GDB file. The TCP/IP host name or the TCP/IP address of the ConDas system would
be appropriate.
In this section, the following variables are recognized:
Variable: nodename
Purpose: TCP/IP host name of the ConDas system
Default: Name of the ConDas system (from <ConDas-System>)
Variable: port
Purpose: TCP/IP port number of the ConDas network server
Default: 4000
Variable: timeout
1KGD 400111 December 2006 153

PGIM 5
Purpose: Timeout period of TCP/IP system calls in milliseconds
Default: 1000
Variable: Cycletime
Purpose: Length of the scanning cycle in milliseconds
Default: 10 milliseconds
Variable: separatorThousand
Purpose: Thousand separator of the .GDB file
Default: Thousand separator of the local Win32 system or "."
Variable: separatorDecimal
Purpose: Decimal separator of the .GDB file
Default: Decimal separator of the local Win32 system or ","
If a blank space is used as a value for the variables separatorThousand or separatorDecimal, the
program will ignore any spaces when reading in numbers (i.e. those for which the C function isspace()
delivers a true value).
The section [ConDasScanner] may exist only once. In this section, the following variable is
recognized:
Variable: debug
Purpose: Logging level
Values: 0 Only errors are logged (default).
1 Warnings are logged.
3 The most important non-iterative methods of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
4 Iterative methods (FindFirst / FindNext) of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
5 Start/Stop methods of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
6 Start/Stop methods of CLogicalScanner are logged.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 154

PGIM 5
7 The ReadThread is logged.
8 Constructors and destructors of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
9 All methods of the FIXScanner layer are logged.
12 "Official" FIX functions are logged (EDA.log only).
15 All functions/methods of the EDA layer are logged (EDA.log only).
20 Calls of WriteSignalToScanMan() are logged.
21 Calls of the ConDasLib interface are logged (EDA.log only).
2.17.5 Log Files

Log files are created in the ...\log\ConDasScanner\ folder with the name ConDasScanner.log and/or
ConDasScanner.log.old. Furthermore, a particular log file EDA.log (or EDA.log.old) is created for the
functions of the intermediate layer (conversion of EDA calls into ConDas calls) into which EDA-specific
messages of the debug levels 0, 1, 12, 15 and 21 are written.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 155

PGIM 5
2.18 Intellution FIX
2.18.1 Introduction
PGIM PGIM PGIM

LAN (TCP/IP)
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
FIX ScanDriver PGIM
Intellution iFIX
LAN (TCP/IP)
reading/writing of
current values
Intellution FIX
EDA interface
2.18.2 The GDB File

In the case of the ScanDriver for Intellution FIX, the definition of the signals to be processed (FIX
terminology: blocks) is performed via a .GDB file. This can be created in the FIX system using the
"Database Builder" tool. Select the Database/Export menu item.
For each SCADA, a folder ...\Confi_FIXScanner\<SCADA-Name> must exist. The first .GDB file
found in this folder will be read.
It is checked whether the SCADA name in the header of the file is identical with the folder name.
The following fields from the .GDB file are evaluated for each signal:
Type
Type of the signal:
AI,CI => analog/read
AO,AR => analog/read-write (AO actually write only)
DI,MDI => binary/read
DO,DR => binary/read-write (DO actually write only)
Only these types are evaluated; signals of other types will be ignored.
Tag Name
1KGD 400111 December 2006 156

PGIM 5
Name of the signal
DESCRIPTION
Description of the signal (long text)
For binary signals (FIX types DI, DO, DR, MDI), the following evaluations are additionally performed:
OPEN TAG
Status text for signal value 0 (statustext0)
CLOSE TAG
Status text for signal value 1 (statustext1)
For analog signals (FIX types AI, AO, AR, CA), the following evaluations are additionally performed:
LOW EGU LIMIT

Measuring range start of the signal (MBA)
HIGH EGU LIMIT

Measuring range end of the signal (MBE)
EGU TAG
Dimension of the measured values of the signal
Note that AO and DO signals in FIX are write-only!
2.18.3 The FIXScanner.ini Control File

The FIXScanner.ini control file is created in the folder ...\Confi_FIXScanner\. The file includes one
section for the configuration of the FIXScanner as well as one or several sections for the configuration
of the SCADAs.
For each SCADA, one section [<SCADA-Name>] may exist where <SCADA-Name> must not be
identical with "FIXScanner".
In this section, the following variables are recognized:
Variable: Cycletime
Purpose: Length of the scanning cycle in milliseconds
Default: 10 milliseconds
Variable: separatorMillion
Purpose: Million- separator of the .GDB file
Default: Million - separator of the local Win32 system or "."
1KGD 400111 December 2006 157

PGIM 5
Variable: separatorThousand
Purpose: Thousand separator of the .GDB file
Default: Thousand separator of the local Win32 system or "."
Variable: separatorDecimal
Purpose: Decimal separator of the .GDB file
Default: Decimal separator of the local Win32 system or ","
If a blank space is used as value for the variables separatorMillion, separatorThousand or

separatorDecimal, , the program will ignore any spaces when reading in numbers (i.e. those for which
the C function isspace() delivers a true value).
Nodename = Nodename
Type = Type
TagName = Tagname
The section [FIXScanner] may exist only once. In this section, the following variable is recognized:
Variable: debug
Purpose: Logging level
Values: 0 Only errors are logged (default).
1 Warnings are logged (at present "FIX is not running" only).
3 The most important non-iterative methods of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
4 Iterative methods (FindFirst / FindNext) of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
5 Start/Stop methods of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
6 Start/Stop methods of CLogicalScanner are logged.
7 The ReadThread is logged.
8 Constructors and destructors of CPhysicalScanner are logged.
9 All methods are logged.
20 The calls of WriteSignalToScanMan() are logged.
2.18.4 Log Files

Log files are created in the ...\log\FIXScanner\ folder with the name FIXScanner.log and/or
FIXScanner.log.old.
2.19 ScanDriver for Mark IV (MarkIVScanner)
2.19.1 Data collection
1KGD 400111 December 2006 158

PGIM 5
PGIM PGIM PGIM
PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PGIM
MARK IV ScanDriver
Multiplexer GE
reading of current process values
Serial interface
MARK IV
Serial data dump
Measured values are sent from the MarkIV system cyclically without any special requirements. They
are passed as a byte stream over a serial interface (the configuration of the interfaces is described in
the following section). The byte stream consists of binary-coded data without any special beginning or
final identifications. In order to make a synchronization possible, is assumed at the beginning of the
byte stream that the time-stamps are always in order, and consist of 6 bytes.
Seconds (0..59)
Minutes (0..59)
Hours (0..23)
Days (1..31)
Month (1..12)
Year (0..255) (+2000 if < 100, else +1900)
Starting from that 7th byte the measured values follow. A measured value can consist of an individual
bit or of two or three bytes.
2.19.2 MarkIVScanner.ini
The file MarkIVScanner.ini is located in the ...\Konfi_MarkIVScanner \ folder. It contains configuration
data for the logical scanners, for example the parameters of the serial interface. The file contains a
section for each logical scanner. The names of the sections correspond to the names of the logical
scanners, for example [ MarkIVScanner01 ], [ MarkIVScanner02 ] etc. In each section the following
variables are recognized:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 159

PGIM 5
Variable Default Aim
Port 1 Number of the used COM Port:

1=COM1:
2=COM2: usw.
Note: The same interface for several logical scanners may not
be used!
Baud rate 9600 Baud rate for the serial interface.
Parity N Parity for the COM Port:
N=none
E=even
O=odd
Databits 8 Number of Databits.
Stopbits 1 Number of Stopbits.
Totalbytes No Def. Total number of the bytes in the data stream, including the
time-stamp (so that many bytes in each cycle of the Mark iv
system are sent).
Timegap 500 Time difference in milliseconds for the recognition of the
transmission gap between two data telegrams of the Mark iv
system. If the temporal distance between two received bytes is
larger than Timegap, this is interpreted as beginning of a new
telegram. If the previous telegram contains less than
Totalbytes bytes, it is regarded as incomplete and discarded.
Note: If the Timegap selected is too small, it is possibly that all
received data will be rejected!
Debug N Activation of the debug mode (Debug = Y). In the debug mode
the data telegrams and the information about the telegram
processing in the log file are inserted. They are received over
the serial interface.
Note: The debug mode should be activated for a logical
scanner in each case. Otherwise the expenditures in the log
file can no longer be assigned.
RefreshDelay 60 This will integrate individual tracing in lists with active cyclic
procedures. The value designates the delay time in seconds. It is
applied to the next list.
2.19.3 Configuration Files *.txt

The definition of the signals which can be processed takes place at the ScanDriver for MarkIV, using
text files. These are located in ...\Konfi_MarkIVScanner folder. For each logical scanner a separate file
with the name of the logical scanner, for example MarkIVScanner01.txt, MarkIVScanner02.txt etc.
must be created. The names of the logical scanners result from the control file MarkIVScanner.ini (See
the previous section for more information)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 160

PGIM 5
The files have a CSV format. The individual data is separated by semicolons. It is possible to read and
work on these files with Microsoft Excel. They can also be produced and processed manually with a
text editor.
A configuration file is developed line by line. A signal is defined in each line. Each line contains,
separated by semicolons, the following information for the signal:
Information Description
Signalname Name of the Signal.

Datatype Type of the Signal:
0: Timer (misc. point). The measured value is transferred into three
bytes and is a whole number, which is divided by 10. It will be sent as
an analog value to PGIM.
1: Analog value (integer point). The measured value is transferred with 2
bytes and consists of a whole number within the range of -32768 to
32767, which is scaled on the basis of the measuring range borders.
2: Binary value (logic point). The measured value is transferred with a
bit within a byte. The bit number is indicated in the following.
3: Counter (misc. point). The measured value is transferred into three
bytes and is a whole number, which is not continued to scale.
Further data types are missing in the Mark iv system.
Startposition The initial position of the measured value within the byte stream. The
smallest possible initial position is 7. The number of bytes results from
the data type.
Bitnumber Number of the bit within the range of 0 to 7. This information is evaluated
only with binary signals.
Description Description of the Signal.
Dimension Dimension of the Signal.
MRB1 Beginning measuring range for the signal. This value is used only for the
scaling of the raw values with analog signals and counter signals. It
corresponds to the raw value 32768.
MRE1 End measuring range for the signal. This value is used only for the
scaling of the raw values with analog signals and counter signals. It
corresponds to the raw value 32767.
Ontext Status text "on" for the signal. This information is evaluated only with
binary signals.
Offtext Statustext "off" for the signal. This information is evaluated only with
binary signals.
MRB2 Beginning measuring range for the signal. This value will be transferred
with analog signals and counter signals to PGIM. If a MRB2 value is not
indicated, then MRB2 = MRB1.
MRE2 Beginning measuring range for the signal. This value will be transferred
with analog signals and counter signals to PGIM. If MRE2 is not
indicated, then MRE2 = MRE1.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 161

PGIM 5
Depending upon the type of signal not all information is relevant. These parameters can remain
empty. One point '.' is the expected decimal separator. This is only necessary when the measuring
range borders are on.
Example for a Configuration
TIMR-01;3;7;;Total fired hours;h;;;;
TTXD1-1;1;25;;Exhaust temperature;Grad C;-2048;2048;;;0;500
L43F;2;194;2;Fire mode selected;;;;yes;no
2.19.4 Log files
Log files are located in the ...\log\MarkIVScanner\ folder with the Name MarkIVScanner.log or
MarkIVScanner.log.old.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 162

PGIM 5
2.20 GSM Protocol for MarkV/VI Scanner

The PGIM Mark V/VI scanner is used to connect components by GSM protocol, see figure below:
PGIM PGIM PGIM

PGIM Server
PGIM ScanManager
PGIM
MARKV / VI ScanDriver
reading / writing of
current process values GE
Network (TCP/IP)
MARK V / VI
GSM protocol
Configuration file for measuring ranges added. In the past the scanner has set the low and high
measurement ranges based on the theoretical limits of the transferred values. Now the ranges could
be defined by a separate file named displayscale.txt. This file contains in each row
a signal name, the start and the end of measuring range and a dimension. E.g.
100_PCT;0.0;100.0;%
For this connection the Mark V/VI uses a so-called GSM server from which the PGIM scanner
transfers the data cyclically together with a timestamp to the PGIM system. Analog data can be
transferred up to 1 s cycle time.
Binary values transferred to PGIM will have a millisecond resolution since the PGIM scanner analyses
events coming from the Mark V and converts the event messages to binary data.
The GSM scanner fully supports the GSM messaging queue, which includes the bi-directional transfer
of messages and events (acknowledgements). Since this functionality is available also on the
connected PGIM OPC AE server and the PGIM OPC DA server this scanner can act as a complete
OPC gateway (connectivity server) to Mark V/VI.
2.20.1 MarkVScanner.ini
The initialization file for the Mark V scanner is located in
1KGD 400111 December 2006 163

PGIM 5
..\Konfi_MarkVScanner\ MarkVScanner.ini
This file contains the data for the logical scanners as well as for all parameters related to the network
connection. Difference for MarkV and Mark VI are indicated in the configuration file through the entry:
Version =
The configuration file consists out of a separate section for each logical scanner. Section names can
be freely configured, e.g. [GT1], [GT2] etc. In each section the scanner recognizes the following
variables:
Variable Default Usage
[GT1] logical Scanner Name

GatewayName IP Address for the connected GE Gateway
Unitname Selection of the GE Controllers (Controller name)
Version 5 Version of the GE Systems; MarkV = 5; MarkVI = 6
Attention: be aware that the configuration data is different
between Mark V and Mark VI !
PeriodicCode 1 cycle time of data transfer
2.20.2 Configuration data for MarkV

The signal definition is similar to other PGIM scan drivers and relates to a text file which is placed
according to the MarkVScanner.ini configuration file. This subdirectory needs to be named as the
logical scan drivers name is defined, e.g. [GT1], [GT2] which translates to:
..\Konfi_MarkVScanner\GT1\
or
..\Konfi_MarkVScanner\GT2\
The signal list can be copied from the GE System and have a fixed and by the GE system defined
format. The following files need to be copied from the MarkV system:
unitdata.dat
LONGNAME.DAT
scledata.dat
alarm.lst
Additionally the following files can be added to this folder:
aliasname.txt Usage of alias names in order of the original GE used names. (same format for Mark V
and Mark VI)
alarm.prio Only together with the usage of the PGIM OPC AE server for reflecting alarm priorities.
(same format for Mark V and Mark VI)
displayscale.txt by adding this file measurement ranges can be given individually to each signal. the
following format of the displayscale.txt file is used:
signal name; min range; max range; eng. unit, e.g.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 164

PGIM 5
100_PCT;0.0;100.0;%
2.20.3 Configuration data of MarkVI

General configuration of MarkVScanner.ini see above section for MarkV Scanner configuration.
The following configuration data need to be copied from the GE Mark VI system:
EGD Network Report.csv
Alarm List Report.csv
Scale List Report.csv
Additionally the following files can be added to this folder:
Aliasname.txt Usage of alias names in order of the original GE used names. (same format for Mark V
and Mark VI)
alarm.prio Only together with the usage of the PGIM OPC AE server for reflecting alarm priorities.
(same format for Mark V and Mark VI)
2.20.4 Log files

Log data for MarkV and MarkVI can be found in
..PLANTCONNECT.Sys\ Debug\Scanner\MarkVScanner\ MarkVScanner.log
and
..PLANTCONNECT.Sys\ Debug\Scanner\MarkVScanner\ MarkVScanner.log.old
1KGD 400111 December 2006 165

PGIM 5
3 OPC-Servers
PGIM provides two different OPC DA servers:
1. OPC DA server which connects to the PGIM ScanManager (legacy)
2. OPC DA server which connects to the database
In the following both OPC DA servers will be described starting with
3.1 OPC DA Server on Scan Manager (legacy)
Scanner 1
PlaCo Scan Manager
Scanner n
PlaCo OPC
OPC Client
Server
Scanner 1
PlaCo Scan Manager
Scanner n
The OPC server for PGIM provides process data from systems which are connected via scan
managers and scanners. The OPC server complies with the OPC specifications 1.0 and 2.0. It is a
"Data Access" server, i.e., only process data is transmitted, no events.
The OPC server is started automatically ("OutProc Server") as an autonomous process as soon as a
client initiates a connection setup.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 166

PGIM 5
3.1.1 Installation
The installation of the OPC server is performed within the scope of the PGIM installation by selecting
the corresponding option.
After the installation, the initialization file of the OPC server must be customized. This file always
resides in the same folder as the OPC server itself. It is only read at the start of the OPC server.
Example of an initialization file:

#------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Plant Connect OPC Server
#
# Filename : PlaCOOPCSrv.ini
# Version : 1.00.release
# Date : 8-Sep-2001
#
# Description : OPC Server Definition File
#
#
#------------------------------------------------------------------------
[COMMON]
# set debug information (On, Off)

Debug = On
# size of tracefile (2 files are toggled)
TraceFileSize = 500000
# number of ScanManager to connect to

NoScanManager = 2
# each ScanManager has its own configuration section

[ScanMan_1]
# name of the ScanManager

# - the name is free configurable
1KGD 400111 December 2006 167

PGIM 5
# - the name will be the first node

# - the name will be part of the access path
ScanManName = SCM_hgp72
# name of the host, the ScanManager is located
ConnectHost = hgp72
# C-style format for the port number

# (either "%d" decimal, or "%x" hexadecimal)
Format = %x
# port number in decimal or hexadecimal C-style
# (decimal = 2069 equals hexadecimal = 0x0815)
Sector [Common]
Debug The text output for program checking is controlled using this parameter.
On The text output logs a multitude of accesses and events within the OPC server.
Note: The performance of the program is affected !
Off Default value. Only errors and basic information at the start of the program will
be logged.
TraceFileSize Determines the size of the log file in bytes. At the start of the program, two files
are generated. The program changes to a new file when the set file size is
reached on the old file. The files are created in an automatically generated "log"
subfolder.
NoScanManager Number of connected ScanManagers. This also determines the number of the
following sectors because each ScanManager requires its own sector for
configuration.
Sector [ScanMan_n]
Each scan manager requires its own sector. If the sector is missing or if the designation of the sector
is faulty (n = number of the scan manager, consecutively numbered, beginning with 1), the OPC
server will not start.
ScanManName Name of the scan manager. The name is freely configurable. The OPC
server uses this name to form the name box when addressing the
process data. This name is the first hierarchy level of the name box.
ConnectHost Name of the computer on which the scan manager has been installed.
This name should also be entered in the file
\%SYSTEMROOT%\system32\drivers\etc\hosts.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 168

PGIM 5
Format Format (C style) of the port number to be read immediately.

%x Port number is indicated in hexadecimal notation.
%d Port number is indicated in decimal notation.
PortNumber TCP port number for communication with the scan manager.
0x0815 Default port number in hexadecimal notation. (In this case, the format
would be "%x".)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 169

PGIM 5
3.1.2 Name Box

The address of a process value is defined via the name box of an OPC server. The name box is
configured in a hierarchical form, like the folder tree of a hard disk.
The name box of the OPC server is set up dynamically.
I. Level
The names of the defined scan managers. The names of the scan managers used in the initialization
file are applied here. These names are static, and they cannot be modified during the runtime of the
OPC server.
II. Level
Name of the scanners. On request, these names are transmitted by the scan managers to the OPC
server. Newly added scanners are recognized and transmitted to the client in the case of a new
inquiry.
III. Level
Names of the process values of a scanner. On request (browsing) by the client, the names are
inquired by the OPC server from the respective scanner and dynamically added to the name box.
Depending on the connected subsystem, the transmission of the names may take some time. Newly
added measuring points can immediately be used without restarting the OPC server.
The character "\" is used as a separator between the hierarchy levels. This character is fixed and
cannot be changed.
Example of addressing:
Scan manager = SCMhost1

Scanner = VSD
Measuring point = TI4711.X/VXA
Address in the name box = SCMhost1\VSD\TI4711.X/VXA
1KGD 400111 December 2006 170

PGIM 5
3.2 OPC DA Server on PGIM Database
PGIM DB
OPC Client PGIM
OPC DA
Server
The PGIM OPC DA server connects to the PGIM database. The advantage of this OPC server is that
clients can subscribe and read data immediately, since the database always has the relevant data
already in it memory caches. The OPC Server allows ready as well as writing.
Configuration of the OPC DA server is done through the following registry keys, which can be found in
\HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Hartmann & Braun\PlantConnect
The following keys are used:

DAConnectTo: Specifies the name of the PGIM database computer where the DA server will
connect to
PlaCoDAUser: Specifies the PGIM user name, which will be used to connect to the PGIM database
As the legacy OPC server the PGIM OPC DA server on the PGIM database needs a local PGIM client
with a valid local PGIM OPC server license.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 171

PGIM 5
3.3 Functionality
The OPC server operates with a dynamic name box (except for the connected scan managers) and
can process newly added scanners and measured values without restarting. The client may, at any
time, add measuring points to a group. The measuring point will then be transmitted to the
corresponding scanner and checked.
The OPC server also supports the browsing of measuring points. However, this may take time and
require computer capacity, depending on the system and on the number of measuring points in the
subsystem.
With started measuring points (OPC group and measuring point enabled), the OPC server operates
event-controlled. The process values are transmitted by the scan manager (legacy OPC server
behavior) in the case of a change (taking into account the tolerance set in the scan manager) and is
immediately signaled to the client (within the cycle time set for the group). In contrast to this the OPC
server on PGIM DB directly reeds the relevant information from the database.
In the case of fast value changes (less than one second), a special feature becomes evident. These
values are collected in the scan manager and then transmitted every second to the OPC server. This
implies that the OPC server will simultaneously receive several process values for one measuring
point. All process values are processed, and a change is signaled to the client. The client will receive
the current process value. Intermediate values are lost. For this reason, cycle times less than one
second are not appropriate for this OPC server.
If a client wants to read all values, including several changes within one second, the cycle time of the
OPC group must be set to zero (Report Mode). Then no process values will be lost. All process values
are stored in a queue and can be polled by the client. In this mode, the client must ensure that all
measured values are polled and processed without interruption.
3.4 Quality Mapping

Mapping PGIM quality information -> OPC-Quality
Description Substatus OPC Quality ScanMan Quality
Good Non-specific 110000LL if Bit 0, 1, 2, 6, 7 und Bit 0 (high Byte) not active
Bad Comm Failure 000110LL if Bit 7 active
Bad Out of Service 000111LL if Bit 0 active
Bad Out of Service 000111LL if Bit 0 (high Byte) active
Bad Non-specific 000000LL if Bit 1 active
Bad Non-specific 000000LL if Bit 2 active
Good Local Override 110110LL if Bit 6 active
Limits Low QQSSSS01 if Bit 5 active

Limits Low QQSSSS01 if Bit 4 (high Byte) active
Limits High QQSSSS10 if Bit 4 active
Limits High QQSSSS10 if Bit 3 (high Byte) active
Limits Low QQSSSS01 if Bit 3 active
1KGD 400111 December 2006 172

PGIM 5
3.5 Implemented Interfaces
IOPCCommon
HRESULT SetLocaleID ( dwLcid )
HRESULT GetLocaleID ( pdwLcid )
HRESULT QueryAvailableLocaleIDs ( pdwCount, pdwLcid )
HRESULT GetErrorString ( dwError, ppString)
HRESULT SetClientName (szName)
IOPCServer
HRESULT AddGroup(szName, bActive, dwRequestedUpdateRate, hClientGroup, pTimeBias, pPercentDeadband,
dwLCID, phServerGroup, pRevisedUpdateRate, riid, ppUnk)
HRESULT GetErrorString(dwError, dwLocale, ppString)
HRESULT GetGroupByName(szName, riid, ppUnk)
HRESULT GetStatus(ppServerStatus)
HRESULT RemoveGroup(hServerGroup, bForce)
HRESULT CreateGroupEnumerator(dwScope, riid, ppUnk)
HRESULT EnumConnectionPoints( IEnumConnectionPoints ppEnum);
HRESULT FindConnectionPoint( REFIID riid, IConnectionPoint ppCP);
IOPCItemProperties
HRESULT QueryAvailableProperties(szItemID, pdwCount,
ppPropertyIDs, ppDescriptions, ppvtDataTypes );
HRESULT GetItemProperties (szItemID, dwCount, pdwPropertyIDs,
ppvData, ppErrors );
HRESULT LookupItemIDs( szItemID, dwCount, pdwPropertyIDs,
ppszNewItemIDs, ppErrors );
IOPCBrowseServerAddressSpace (optional)
HRESULT QueryOrganization(pNameSpaceType );
HRESULT ChangeBrowsePosition(dwBrowseDirection, szString );
HRESULT BrowseOPCItemIDs( dwBrowseFilterType, szFilterCriteria, vtDataTypeFilter, dwAccessRightsFilter,
ppIEnumString );
HRESULT GetItemID( szItemDataID, szItemID );
HRESULT BrowseAccessPaths( szItemID, ppIEnumString );
1KGD 400111 December 2006 173

PGIM 5
IOPCGroupStateMgt
HRESULT GetState(pUpdateRate, pActive, ppName, pTimeBias, pPercentDeadband, pLCID, phClientGroup,
phServerGroup)
HRESULT SetState(pRequestedUpdateRate, pRevisedUpdateRate, pActive, pTimeBias, pPercentDeadband,
pLCID, phClientGroup)
HRESULT SetName(szName);
HRESULT CloneGroup(szName, riid, ppUnk);
IOPCSyncIO
HRESULT Read(dwSource, dwCount, phServer, ppItemValues, ppErrors)
HRESULT Write(dwCount, phServer, pItemValues, ppErrors)
IOPCAsyncIO2
HRESULT Read(dwCount, phServer, dwTransactionID, pdwCancelID, ppErrors,)
HRESULT Write(dwCount, phServer, pItemValues, dwTransactionID, pdwCancelID, ppErrors);
HRESULT Cancel2 (dwCancelID);
HRESULT Refresh2(dwSource, dwTransactionID, pdwCancelID);
HRESULT SetEnable(bEnable);
HRESULT GetEnable(pbEnable);
IOPCItemMgt
HRESULT AddItems(dwCount, pItemArray, ppAddResults, ppErrors)
HRESULT ValidateItems(dwCount, pItemArray, bBlobUpdate, ppValidationResults, ppErrors)
HRESULT RemoveItems(dwCount, phServer, ppErrors)
HRESULT SetActiveState(dwCount, phServer, bActive, ppErrors)
HRESULT SetClientHandles(dwCount, phServer, phClient, ppErrors)
HRESULT SetDatatypes(dwCount, phServer, pRequestedDatatypes, ppErrors)
HRESULT CreateEnumerator(riid, ppUnk)
HRESULT EnumConnectionPoints( IEnumConnectionPoints ppEnum);
HRESULT FindConnectionPoint( REFIID riid, IConnectionPoint ppCP);
1KGD 400111 December 2006 174

PGIM 5
IOPCAsyncIO (old)
HRESULT Read(dwConnection, dwSource, dwCount, phServer, pTransactionID, ppErrors,)
HRESULT Write(dwConnection, dwCount, phServer, pItemValues, pTransactionID, ppErrors);
HRESULT Cancel (dwTransactionID);
HRESULT Refresh(dwConnection, dwSource, pTransactionID);
IDataObject (old)
HRESULT Dadvise(pFmt, adv, pSnk, pConnection);
HRESULT Dunadvise(Connection);
Note: all other functions can be stubs which return E_NOTIMPL.
IEnumOPCItemAttributes
HRESULT Next(celt, ppItemArray, pceltFetched);
HRESULT Skip(celt);
HRESULT Reset( void);
HRESULT Clone(ppEnumItemAttributes);
1KGD 400111 December 2006 175

PGIM 5
3.6 PGIM OPC DA Server Performance Test

Monitor
Processor load (%)
Values/s Lokal DCOM
100 Mbit LAN
5000 Min 4% 3%
Max 15% 12%
Avg 8% 8%
10000 Min 10,9% 10,1%
Max 21,2% 20,2%
Avg 14,4% 14,4%
15000 Min 13,9% 15%
Max 25% 25%
Avg 18,8% 19,2%
20000 Min 23% 24%
Max 34% 68%
Avg 28% 35,8%
25000 Min 26% 100%
Max 79% 100%
Avg 43,8% 100%
3.7 OPC HDA Compliance Key

OPC-HDA-Compliance in reading HDA Raw Values.
Attention: To enable the compliance behavior instead of the 800xA optimized behavior you
have to
Enter in the Registry where the HDA Server is hosted (typically Connectivity Server) under
SOFTWARE\Hartmann & Braun\PlantConnect
a new key:
HDAtuning=1
(Default value is 0 , which is the old 800xA optimized behavior)
The difference to the old version is that the new one deals with OPC_NOBOUND state info and a
OPCHDA_MOREDATA return value of requesting less values than in that time domain available.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 176

PGIM 5
4 Database / Server
4.1 Introduction
All signals which are made available within the PGIM system are stored in a database which is
optimized for the special requirements of plant management. That means that a large number of
signals (currently up to 100.000 signals per server, please refer to PGIM data sheet for actual
performance) can be managed in the PGIM database. Measured values with a high time resolution
are saved for these signals. They can easily be accessed by the evaluation functions.
The database is divided into the "static" information about signals and the actual measured value
sequences. These sequences are saved in a file system where the folder name for measured value
sequences is derived from the signal name.
"Static" information, which is not changed with each measured value, includes, for example,
measuring range start and measuring range end. Along from this information additional attributes
(such as "cost center") can be defined by the user for the signals, and parameterized immediately.
The PGIM server controls the data transfer from the PGIM database to the individual inquiring
applications. Inquiries regarding the representation of current process values in process displays or
trend displays can be take place. Inquiries can also include average values for characteristic value
calculations, as well as maximum or minimum values for logs. Communication is performed via
TCP/IP protocol.
The structure of the PGIM database is signal-oriented. First, the values are written by the
ScanManager into the random-access memory (RAM) in the PGIM database according to the changes
made.
A flash algorithm provides the optimal packet-oriented storage of the values on the hard disk. These
have been stored in the volatile memory before. Using additional cache algorithms data loss is
reduced when unexpected computer failures take place. The archives for the different signals have a
uniform fractionation which usually includes 1 day. Consequently, the size of the different archives
varies considerably depending on the plant operation and the adjusted tolerance band.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 177

PGIM 5
4.2 Start / Stop
4.2.1 Start the server

After the installation of a PGIM server and the subsequent restart of the system, the server is installed
as service under Windows. A check is possible using Start, Settings, Control panel, Services in the
taskbar. Select the entry "PGIM Server" in the list of services. There you will find in the Status
column the value "Started" and in the column Kind of start the entry Automatic.
If there is no entry in the "Status" column of the server, it has not yet been started. This will only be the
case if you have not restarted the system after the installation or if the server has been stopped
manually. In such a case, click the Start button in the service manager. Then the server will be
started, which takes approx. 5 to 10 seconds.
4.2.2 Stop the server

Usually, it is not necessary to stop the server. If, however, you want to stop the server, select Start,
Settings, Control panel, Services in the taskbar. Select the entry "PGIM Server" in the list of
services and click the Terminate button. If you also want to prevent re-starting the server after a
restart of the system, you must additionally click the Kind of start .. button and select Manual.
4.2.3 Status monitoring of the server

To observe the internal status of the server, you may use a normal web browser (for example
Microsoft Internet Explorer). Start the web browser and enter the name of the PGIM Server as a URL.
For Example: The name of the server is mip311. Enter mip311 as the URL. (The web browser
automatically extends the entry to http:\\mip311. Now you will see some basic operating data for the
selected server.
Note: This functionality is only of use to the PGIM administrator. Therefore, the menu guidance is
neutrally performed in English.
Explanation of the different points:
Progress state: Indicates the most important last status message of the server.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 178

PGIM 5
Standard value: "Start Up Complete"
Server is: Status of the server. Standard value: "On"
TCP/IP Server: Status of the PGIM network service. Standard value: "Run".
Note: If PGIM is stopped in the NT service manager, "Stopped" is
indicated here.
DB Average Storing Rate: Indicates the average number of incoming measured values to be stored
(From the ScanManager or from the clients).
Current Client Reading Rate: Indicates the average reading rate of clients, measured in measured
values per second.
Current Client Connections: List of clients being logged in at the moment.
License Information: Indicates the available number of signals (tags) and clients.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 179

PGIM 5
4.3 Time synchronization between clients and server

Using the Windows command at and a respective command file the computer clock of the client PC
can cyclically be set to the time of the server. The task added to the time scheduler of Windows is
executed independently from the user logged in. This is still available even if the computer was re-
booted. Entering at at the command prompt (On the taskbar, click the Start button, and then click
Run) to list the task.
Example:
Input: at 4:00 /every:Mo,Di,Mi,Do,Fr,Sa,So C:\Programs\SyncTimeAt.cmd
Output on screen:
New task added. ID = 1
Input: at
Output on screen:
Status-ID Day Time Command

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Every Mo Di Mi Do Fr...04:00 AM C:\Programs\SyncTimeAt.cmd
Input: at 1
Output on screen:
Task-ID: 1
Status: OK
Schedule: Every Mo Di Mi Do Fr Sa So
Time: 04:00 AM
Interactive: No
Command: C:\Programs\SyncTimeAt.cmd
Content of the command file „SyncTimeAt.cmd"

net time \\<server name> /set /yes >C:\NETTIME.LOG
at >>C:\NETTIME.LOG
1KGD 400111 December 2006 180

PGIM 5
4.4 Diagnosis
The PGIM server (database) can be analyzed with the help of a Web Browser (for example the
Internet Explorer). The web browser must be started and the name of the PGIM server must be
entered as sn address (for example http://PlaCoSrv). The Webport is adjusted to 89 by default. It can
be changed in the file PlaCo.INI, for example to 81. Only SysAdmin users are permitted to use this
address.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 181

PGIM 5
Input of the password of a user from the SysAdmin group to open the next level.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 182

PGIM 5
4.4.1 Client Connections

A list of up-to-date connected Clients is displayed, along with indications of the last access and the IP
address. Select the Clients in the kill column and press the Kill key to delete the connection to the
Client, and release the license.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 183

PGIM 5
4.4.2 The 1000 fastest Signals

A list of the 1000 most frequent stored signals appears. You can use this information to optimize the
properties of the deadband, and thus the allocation of the hard disk. If you have a very high storage
rate the deadband should be increased.
The columns have the following meaning:
• Signalname
Name of the signal.
• Amount(Lifetime)
Number of all values over the lifetime of this signal. Values already exported are not considered.
Contains the up-to-date available values in the database.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 184

PGIM 5
• Ta[sec](Lifetime)
Average alteration rate over the entirely available time of the signal (small value: high alteration rate,
large value: small alteration rate).
Calculation:
Ta[sec](Lifetime) = (TimeOfLatestValue - TimeOfFirstVale) / Amount(Lifetime)
Note: The whole list is sorted by this column.
• Ta[sec](cache,estimated)
Each signal has its own Cache in the RAM, in which about on the average 100 - 500 values are
stored. "Ta[sec](cache, estimated)" indicates the alteration rate of the values up-to-date available in
the Cache.
Calculation:
Ta[sec](cache,estimated) = (TimeOfLatestCacheValue - TimeOfFirstCVacheValue) /
Amount(Cache)
Note: If you optimize (change the deadband), then the result is first readable with these values. The
ranking in the list does not change however, since the whole list is still stored after "Ta[sec](Lifetime)"
The position in the list of the fastest signals (thus the "Ranking") will only change slowly over time.
• Deadband
The current deadband. Value in % of the scaling (= scale end – scale beginning).
• firstMW
The first (oldest) value in the database.
• lastMW
The last (youngest) value in the database.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 185

PGIM 5
4.5 Server Redundance for High Availability
4.5.1 Introduction
Two server computers as similar as possible (performance & HD capacity) with the same license data
(LCFG.INI) mutually mirror all writing logs. Incoming signal values of the scanners are mirrored, along
with all configuration actions such as signal creation, attribute changes, and signal deletion. Even
configuration changes regarding user accounts will be mirrored.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 186

PGIM 5
4.5.2 Function mode
Two equal PGIM servers are connected in a Network, and additionally connected via a separate direct
network link between both servers. This separate link is necessary for the adjustment between the
redundant servers. For the PGIM clients the redundant server looks like one server. A PGIM client
contacts only the logical server SRV, not the SRV1.1 or SRV1.2 (see Picture 1
If a server fails, the IPSwitch gates the telegram to the second server.
A client application recognizes this by a short-time connection break which, depending on the client,
will either be reported (manual restart required depending on the respective client), or the client has
implemented an automatic restart. In that case, the user will not become aware of the switchover.
Picture 1: Example of a redundant PGIM system: Server and Scanner are on different computers
Note: The telegram being transmitted during a network break will be lost. This means that the client
must repeat this telegram.
If a computer fails, the inactive server transmits a message to the EventManagement.

Moreover, a CMD command can be activated.
Different types of the redundant installations are possible:

Case 1: One redundant server, scanner and client applications are located on a different computer.
Case 2: One redundant server and client applications are located on the same computer.
Case 3: One redundant server, scanner and client applications are located on the same computer.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 187

PGIM 5
4.5.3 Installation (Case 1)

To install redundant PGIM databases you must choose the right installation.
PGIM Server database, Client applications and scanner are installed on

different computers
The following settings are also possible with the "PGIM System Configuration" tool
(...PlantConnect.bin\tools\PlaCoConfiTool.exe).
Install PGIM server via setup.
Do NOT start the server (service: to manual)
Make the following entries in the PlaCo.INI for [Server.Settings] on SRV1.1:
:
[Server.Settings]
; === That is the redundancy counterpart:
RedundancyServer=SRV3.2
; === That is executed in the case of a failure:
AtRedundancyFailureDo=RedFailure.cmd
; === At the start, the server is waiting xx minutes for the redundancy peer.
; Default without specification: 30 min
AtRedundancyStartUpWaitMinutesForPeer=5
:
[Server.Settings]
Also check the following:

- The license file entries must be identical on both servers.
- PlaCo.INI: LifeTimeDaysRoh must be identical.
- Hard disk capacity must be identical.
- PC performance should nearly be the same.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 188

PGIM 5
4.5.3.1 IPSwitch in the Client Network (Redproxy)

To enable a client to see one redundancy server (SRV), an IPSwitch is installed and configured on
each client. For all client applications (SignalExplorer, Curve Display, Excel, ...), only the logic server
name must be used. The connection to the physical server is established by the IPSwitch.
The IPSwitch knows both IP names of the servers, for example: SRV1.1 and SRV1.2, and presents
them to the client using one name, for example: SRV.
The IPSwitch is installed by executing:
"....\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\Proxy\Redproxy –install".
It may be de-installed by executing: "....\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\Proxy\Redproxy –remove".
You must edit the names of the servers in the registry.
Example:
Description Name IP Address
physical PGIM server 1 SRV1.1 192.168.10.1
logic PGIM server SRV
On each client, the following must be entered in the "Hosts" file:

127.0.0.1 localhost SRV # logic PGIM server
192.168.10.1 SRV1.1 # physical PGIM server
The registry input must be like the following:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\PlantConnect\RedProxy\LocalPortNumber 4242
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\PlantConnect\RedProxy\RemoteComputerName1 SRV1.1
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\PlantConnect\RedProxy\RemotePortNumber1 4242
You must change the example names SRV1.1, SRV1.2 and SRV to the real names.
The redproxy installation must be done on the Scanner computers also.
Note:
In this installation case the redproxy should not be installed on the servers.
4.5.3.2 IPSwitch in the Client Network (Redproxy)

Note: in picture 1 the scanner neighborhood includes different networks for the office net and the DCS
net. This is not necessary, but in most cases this is the layout.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 189

PGIM 5
The redproxy installation must be done on the Scanner computers in the same manner as the client.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 190

PGIM 5

In the case of the installation of redundant PGIM databases you must choose the right installation.
PGIM Server database and Client applications are installed on the same
computer.
The following settings are also possible with the "PlaCoConfiTool"

:
[Server.Settings]
; === This is the redundancy counterpart:
; === This is executed in the case of a failure:
ServerPort=4241
:
[Server.Settings]
ServerPort=4241

1KGD 400111 December 2006 191

PGIM 5
4.5.4.1 IPSwitch Case 2

To enable a client to see one redundancy server (SRV), an IPSwitch is installed and configured on
each client. For all client applications (SignalExplorer, Curve Display, Excel, ...), only the logic server
name must be used. The connection to the physical server is established by the IPSwitch.
The IPSwitch knows both IP names of the servers, for example: SRV1.1 and SRV1.2 and presents
Example:

The redproxy installation must be done on the Scanner computers also.
Note:
In this installation case the redproxy must be installed on the servers also.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 192

PGIM 5

In the case of the installation of redundant PGIM databases you must choose the right installation.
PGIM Server database, Scanner and Client applications are installed on

the same computer.
The following settings are also possible with the "PlaCoConfiTool"

:
[Server.Settings]
; === This is executed in case of a failure:
ServerPort=4241
:
[Server.Settings]
; === This is executed in case of a failure:
ServerPort=4241
In the ScanMan.ini (...PlantConnect.bin\Scanner\ScanMan\) section [ScanMan] put in following:
[ScanMan]
Portnumber=2068
Name=SC

1KGD 400111 December 2006 193

PGIM 5
1KGD 400111 December 2006 194

PGIM 5
4.5.5.1 IPSwitch Case 3

On each PGIM client the IPSwitch must be installed. In the case 3 installation the IPSwitch must also
be installed on the servers.
Clients which may connect to the scanners must install 2 redproxys.
4.5.5.1.1 Installation of the first IPSwitch

For any client to see one redundancy server (SRV), an IPSwitch is installed and configured on each
client. For all client applications (SignalExplorer, Curve Display, Excel, ...), only the logic server name
must be used. The connection to the physical server is established by the IPSwitch.
The IPSwitch knows both IP names of the servers, for example: SRV1.1 and SRV1.2 and presents
Example:

4.5.5.1.2 Installation of the second IPSwitch

The second ip-switch can be installed with the command:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 195

PGIM 5

1KGD 400111 December 2006 196

PGIM 5
4.6 Handling instructions relating to typical scenarios

There are 4 typical scenarios in connection with the redundancy mode of a PGIM server:
1. New installation of a redundancy system
2. Expansion of an existing server to redundancy
3. Failure and restore of a redundancy partner
4. Failure of both computers.
4.6.1 New installation of a redundancy system

1. Install the PGIM server on PC A as well as on PC B without taking into account a redundancy.
2. Start PC A and B as simultaneously as possible because A is waiting for B and vice versa. The
window of time for a successful redundancy start includes approx. 30 min (default value). This is
adjustable in PlaCo.INI.
3. When starting with two WebExplorers, observe the login pages of both servers, or observe the
messages via ShowEvents or EventClient. These will signal the redundancy mode, and include a
redundancy-oriented logging. The final message must be: "Redundancy startup: Ok, both Servers
are balanced !"
4.6.2 Expansion of an existing server to redundancy

1. Install the new redundancy computer.
2. Reconfigure the PlaCo.INI on the original computer to redundancy.
3. Quickly stop and restart the original server.
4. Immediately (within the 30 min time window) start the redundancy server.
5. Balance manually.
4.6.3 One redundancy partner fails

1. This is logged as an error in the EventManagement (if it exists) and the shell program
"AtRedundancyFailureDo=DoThis.cmd" (depending on the setting in PlaCo.INI) will be called.
2. To restart and balance the failed computer, it must first meet the requirements specified by the
Server Redundant Installation.
3. Balancing is performed approx. 42 seconds after the restart of the failed redundancy partner,
which also initiates the balancing. It automatically logs on to the active partner and starts
balancing.
NOTE: Depending on the number of tags and the duration of failure, balancing may take a
few hours.
The balanced server will be reachable again for clients only after balancing is
complete.
4.6.4 Both servers fail
1KGD 400111 December 2006 197

PGIM 5
The behavior in this case is as follows:
- If both servers started "simultaneously" within the startup time window (default: 30 min):
YES:
- Then the server which has failed first will be balanced to the server failed last.
NO:
- Then both signal in the log:
=== ATTENTION ! CONFUSING SITUATION ! ===
- Peer Server is still down during my start up !
- Manual balancing recommended !
You must decide which server has the better data. Then you must initiate manually balancing.
If both servers announce this status, then the following procedures must be accomplished:
1. Decide which server has the better data. Start this one (DOS NTA starting IP
server). Wait unit this server is available to receive data from the scanners and
from the PGIM Clients.
2. Start the alignment on the other server (see the "ManualBalancing" section)
4.6.5 Manual balancing

Manual balancing should only be performed in the case of a disturbance in both servers, or in the case
of increasing the system from one server to a redundant server. It can, however, be executed
whenever required.
Execute the following via the WebExplorer for the server to be balanced:
DOS NTA stopIPServer. NTA balanceMe.
After successful balancing (which may take some time), the balanced server will automatically be
online again.
4.6.6 Start of only one server without redundancy partner

Note: In principle you are not allowed to start only one server! This situation should not arise, and
should not occur even when simultaneously stopping both servers.
Nevertheless, a scenario can be constructed where this situation can occur. Imagine one server fails
due to a hardware defect and is not available for a couple of days. If the second server fails also (for
example due to a power failure) during this time, then this is a situation in which the server should start
alone without its peer.
After the automatic start (Reboot) the server would try again to connect to its partner in the
configured time window. After that the server returns a message indicating that the partner is not
available, and that the partner will stay offline.
In this situation are allowed to set this server online without its partner. Do this by entering "DOS NTA
startIPServer" in the SQL Page.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 198

PGIM 5
4.7 Redundancy Manager

The redundancy manager offers the system administrator the ability to get the system conditions of
the redundant server.
Click the field "click here to refresh the screen" to obtain a current analysis of the server redundancy.
Click the Detailed Analysis Report button to obtain more information:
A detailed analysis of the redundant server is displayed. The displayed text depends upon conditions
of the redundant server as explained below.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 199

PGIM 5
4.7.1 Possible texts in the detail analysis

#[1]
- Short description:
Server #1 is running and is online. Server #2 is not accessible.
- Measures:
* Check server #2 and the network connections.
* Then restart server #2!
#[2]
IP-Server #1 is offline and server #2 cannot be achieved. NOTE: The Clients cannot reach the
server in this state!
- Measures:
* First check #1 and if everything is ok, start up the IP-Server #1 again.
* Check network and server #2. Then start server #2 again.
#[3]
ERROR!
Neither servers #1 nor #2 are attainable by Ping.
* Check the network connections and the configuration of both servers!
* Then boot both servers.
* Monitor the Startup.
#[4]
ERROR!
#1 is not accessible, server #2 is not attainable by Ping.
- Measures:
* Check server #2 and network locally.
* Start both servers at the same time again.
* Monitor the Startup.
#[5]
Normal operation. The servers are balanced and ok.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 200

PGIM 5
#[6]
NOTE: Both IP-Servers are stopped! Scanners and Clients cannot write and/or read data at present.
* Consider the following causes. Based on the cause decide further measures.
#[7]
NOTE: IP-Server on #1 is not running!
Check, why is the IP-Server is not running?
* Then start again.
#[8]
#1 switched to the alternative IP line #2 because the standard-IP-mirror-connection was not
available at the point in time #3.
* Perform a Network examination: Check the mirror line!
* #1 will try again to reach the standard IP line after 1 hour. Wait for this amount of time and check the
status again.
#[9]
#1 switched to the alternative IP line #2 because the standard IP mirror connection was not available
at the point in time #3.
* Perform a Network examination: Check the mirror line!
* #1 will try again to reach the standard IP line after 1 hour. Wait for this amount of time and check the
status again.
#[10]
Startup of server #1 is still running. Start was at # 3. NOTE: Server #2 is not started.
* NOTE: Start server #2 as soon as possible, otherwise server #1 will not be able to terminate its
startup!
#[11]
CONFUSING SITUATION.
#1 had a redundancy error, but the IP-Server is still running.
* Why is the IP-Server still running on #1? Check and if necessary switch off.
* Check locally #1, then start #1 again.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 201

PGIM 5
#[12]
Redundancy error on #1.
* Check locally.
* Stop the server-service on #1 and start again or boot.
#[13]
Redundancy error.
Probably the server-service on #1 was stopped manually.
* Restart the server-service on #1.
#[14]
Redundancy error on # 1.
Server-service started but server #1 does not react. Reason unclear.
* Check locally then start server-service on #1 or boot #1.
#[15]
#2 detected a redundancy error on #1. Breakdown-time was #3
(Maybe the server-service on #1 was stopped manually or #1 is still in the starting procedure)
* Consider the further causes below following Analysis.
* Restart the server-service on #1 again.
#[16]
Redundancy error on # 1.
Main voltage or network or computer error on # 1.
* Check server and network locally.
* Then start server-service on #1 or restart #1.
#[17]
Startup of server #1 is still running. Start was at #2
* Wait for end of the starting procedure.
#[18]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 202

PGIM 5
CONFUSING SITUATION on #1: At the Startup of #1 the redundancy partner #2 was not attainable.
Reason: Network problems between #1 and #2 during the startup phase.
- Description of details:
At the start of this server a connection to the redundancy partner could not be recovered. This
occurred again after an xx minute waiting period. The redundancy-partner is available to the network
and the redundancy partner server is likewise accessible by the Redundancy Manager. The partner-
IP-Server is running and is therefore also available for Clients.
- Reasons:
The situation points on the fact that the network connections (as well the mirror connection as the
alternative IP connection which can be configured) was not available during the starting procedure.
- Measures:
* Check and locally insure that the mirror connection between the servers operates now. (Ping each
other)
* Now stop/start the server-service or boot the server again.
#[19]
CONFUSING SITUATION on both servers. The reason is probably network problems when in the
starting phase or the nonexistence of the partner server during the whole starting phase.
At the start of this server a connection to the redundancy-partner could not be recovered. This
occurred again after an xx minute waiting period. The redundancy-partner is available to the network
and the redundancy-partner-server is likewise accessible by the Redundancy Manager. The partner-
IP-Server is not running, is therefore not available. It indicates that the partner-server had problems
finding its partner while starting. - > NOTE: This is a critical situation because none of the two servers
is available online for Clients.
- Reasons:
The situation points to the fact that the network connections (as well the mirror connection as the
alternative IP connection which can be configured) were not available during the starting procedure.
- Measures:
* Check all network connections locally.
* Because none of the two servers is active the administrator must start the IP-server (DOS NTA
startIPServer) on the server that contains the more current and more correct data. The clues are in the
information about the number of tags, values and lastMW.
* After that start the balancing on the other server by using "DOS NTA balancMe".
#[20]
Startup at the redundancy-partner #1 is still running.
* Wait for the result...
#[21]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 203

PGIM 5
At the redundancy-partner #1 the Balancing is still running.
* Wait ...
#[22]
Redundancy-partner #1 is started but the IP-Server is offline.
* Was the IP-Server perhaps set offline manually for maintenance? If so set it back online.
#[23]
Redundancy-partner #1 is not started (state=#2). Number of tags or values or indexes did not match
at the partner's start. (Partner is waiting for user's decision)
* Check the partner and repair.
#[24]
CONFUSING SITUATION
At the Startup the redundancy-partner #1 was not attainable by Ping.
* Check #1 locally. Then stop both servers and start again at the same point in time.
- Situation:
At the start of this server a connection to the redundancy-partner could not be recovered. This
occurred again after an xx minute waiting period. The redundancy-partner is also not attainable by
Ping. Either no network connection to the redundancy-partner exists, or the computer is switched off.
-> NOTE: This is a critical situation because none of the two servers is available online for Clients.
- Measures:
1) Check network and hardware locally and check whether the partner-server-service stands on
"automatic".
2) Stop both server-services.
3) Now start the server-service again (as close as possible to the same time) or boot both servers
(as close as possible to the same time).
#[25]
Server #1 had a breakdown and/or was stopped but has more signals than the redundancy-partner
#2 now.
Information: The server #1 remains preliminarily closed for clients.(IPServer OFF)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 204

PGIM 5
At the start of server #1 it was noticed that server #1 was shut down normally and the partner-server
#2 took over at that time. Further on it was noticed that the partner-server #2 has fewer signals than
server #1. A reason could be that the signals were deleted on server #2 during the "ServerDown"-time.
- Measures:
* If signals were deleted during the breakdown-time by users then #1 must be adjusted. (Open the
Internet explorer and log in on http:\\#1, then implement under Direct SQL the command "DOS NTA
balanceMe").
* If you are however sure that despite this server-analysis this failed server #1 has the more current
signals and data then start the balancing on server #2.(Open the Internet explorer and log in on
http:\\#2, then implement under Direct SQL the command "DOS NTA balanceMe").
#[26]
Server #1 had a breakdown and/or was stopped but has more values than the redundancy-partner
now. Therefore the IP-Server at #1 remains offline (IPServer OFF).
At the start of server #1 it was noticed that server #1 was shut down normally and that the partner-
server #2 took over at that time. Further on it was noticed that the partner-server has fewer signals
than this server. A reason could be a normal procedure: for example if signals were deleted on server
#2 during the "ServerDown"-time (ring - archive).
- Measures:
* If the breakdown-time was > 1 day and if old data will be deleted daily (ring - Archive) then the
balancing must be started manually on #1. (Open the Internet explorer and log in on http:\\#1, then
implement under Direct SQL the command "DOS NTA balanceMe").
* If signals were deleted by users during the breakdown-time then #1 must be adjusted as follows.
(Open the Internet explorer and log in on http:\\#1 then implement under Direct SQL the command
"DOS NTA balanceMe").
* If you are sure that despite this server-analysis this failed server #1 has data that is the most
current, then start the balancing on server #2.(Open the Internet explorer and log in on http:\\#2, then
implement under Direct SQL the command "DOS NTA balanceMe").
#[27]
Server #1 had a breakdown and/or was stopped but has more current values than the redundancy-
partner now. Therefore the IP-Server at #1 remains offline.
At the start of this server it was noticed that this server was shut down normally and that the partner-
server took over for that time. Further on it was noticed that the partner-server has fewer tags than this
server. A reason could be a normal procedure: for example if tags were deleted by SignalExplorer on
the other server during the "ServerDown"-time. Because of fewer amounts of data on the partner this
means that during the balancing fewer amounts of data were reflected than were available on this
server. Check the accuracy of the conditions.
- Measures:
* Check data consistency on #1, compare with #2.
* Decide on which server to start the balancing.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 205

PGIM 5
* Start the balancing on the selected server now.
* Start the IP-Server (if stopped) on the other server.
#[28]
Server #1 had a breakdown and/or was stopped (regular breakdown).
Balancing supplied automatically now.
- Situation:
At the start of this server it was noticed that this server had a breakdown and the partner-server took
over at that time. Balancing supplied automatically on this server now.
- Measures:
None
#[29]
This server had a breakdown. The redundancy-partner, however, had nothing to mirror in the
breakdown-time (this arises when a server is shut down and no Client writes occur during this time.)
Balancing is not necessary. The IP-Server automatically goes online.
- Situation:
At the start of this server it was noticed that during the stop-time that the other server was active but
there were no writing operations which were completed. Therefore there was no redundancy error and
balancing must not be initiated. The data is still identical. This situation can occur if the Admin shuts
down the server for maintenance and during this time he stops all Clients (users and ScanManager)
from doing write operations. Thus the balancing is not necessary at the start, and the server is online
faster.
- Measures:
None
#[30]
This server had a breakdown and the redundancy-partner had nothing to mirror during the
breakdown down-time, but he has nevertheless more values.
(Possible because on #2 meanwhile fewer data exists because of an export) Balancing supplied
automatically now.
- Situation:
At the start of this server it was noticed that this server was not shut down normally (for example
Main voltage error ?). But during the stop-time the other server was active. During the stop-time there
were no writing operations which could be reflected. Therefore this was no redundancy error. Because
the redundancy-partner has more data the balancing will be started automatically. (A reason may be
because of manual manipulation or cache loss on this server during a breakdown)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 206

PGIM 5
- Measures:
None
#[31]
Server #1 was switched off but #2 did not write in that time. Therefore the Servers are still balanced.
OK.
- Situation:
Main voltage error ?). But the redundancy-partner had not noticed a breakdown (because it was
stopped, or there were no writing operations which could be reflected). Therefore this was no
redundancy error. Because this server has more data (a reason could be manual manipulation on the
redundancy-partner) this server goes online now.
- Measures:
None
#[32]
#1 had failed. #2 noticed no breakdown. Primary-index-tables are however unequal! Check first who
the current server is. On the other one start the balancing manually.
- Situation:
Main voltage error ?). But the redundancy-partner had not noticed a breakdown (because it was
stopped, or there were no writing operations which could be reflected). The internal check showed that
the primary-index-tables are not identical. (A reason could be manual manipulation on the
redundancy-server by the configuration). This IP-Server does not go online.
- Measures:
1) Analyze and decide which server is the current one, and on which server the balancing must be
started.
2) Start the balancing on the selected server now. Start the IP-Server on the other server (if
stopped).
#[33]
Either:
a) #1 is started for the first time.
b) The machine was exchanged because of a hardware failure.
c) It was reconfigured manually (for example the drive was changed or the PlaCo.INI was incorrectly
changed, etc.).
1) Check whether #2 a) is online and b) whether #1 has the most current data.
2) If it (1) applies: Start the balancing on this computer.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 207

PGIM 5
- Situation:
This server is a) either started for the first time or b) the machine was exchanged because of a
hardware failure or c) it was reconfigured manually (for example the drive was changed or the
PlaCo.INI was incorrectly changed).
- Measures:
1) Check whether the other server a) is online and b) is the one with the most current data.
2) If it (1) applies: Start the balancing on this computer.
#[34]
On server #1 is currently active and balancing with #2.
- Measures:
* For this time none measures. Wait for the end of the balancing and check the result.
#[35]
Server #1 adjusted itself on the other server at #2.
#[36]
Redundancy-configuration-error. #1 is not configured as a redundancy-server. Check both server
configurations (PlaCo.INI). Then start both server PCs at the same time again.
#[37]
Server #1 is running and is online. No errors are announced to server #2.
Server #2 is however not accessible from here.
* Check the network connection to server #2.
#[38]
Server #1 is running and is online. Server #2 is accessible by the network but is not responsive,
although the server-service is running. This situation is possibly caused by a manual stop of # 2, or an
unknown problem on server #2.
* Check server #2
* Then restart of #2!
#[39]
On #1 the balancing is running. Therefore the IP-Server is still stopped. Ok.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 208

PGIM 5
#[40]
On both redundancy-server-machines the PGIM server-services is not started.
* Start both server-services at the same time (approximately).
* Monitor the starting procedure.
* Information: Check also whether the server-services are adjusted to be "automatic".
4.8 Replace the PGIM Server Hardware (Maintenance)

This chapter describes the approach to replace the PGIM server hardware by keeping all
configurations and collected data. This is normally the case when the hardware becomes old and
needs to be replaces for availability or performance reasons.
4.8.1 Starting Position Single PGIM Server

The system consists out of a single PGIM server which is up and running. On this computer we do not
find a scan manager on it – that means all scan managers are on different computers.
Usage of the same PGIM version on the old and new server.
This description will use the name Old-Server and New-Server to distinguish between the old and the
new hardware.
4.8.2 Update procedure for “hostname stays the same“

This procedure implies that the new computer will have the same hostname as the old computer.
Step 1: Install the base operating system software and tools. Give the New-Server the same
hostname as the Old-Server. Do not connect them to the same network though. If you are planning to
do that, choose a different temporary hostname for the New-Server – you will need to rename it later
on.
Step 2: Install the New-Server with the PGIM server software from the CD. Install the license file with
at least the capabilities as the Old-Server had. Do no configuration on the server itself. When you are
installing a client on this computer, make sure that you are using the Old-Server’s hostname during
the installation procedure – do NOT use the new temporary one – we are going to replace the
temporary hostname later!
Step 3: On both the Old-Server and the New-Server stop the PGIM server services.
Step 4: Copy all data from
../PGIM/PlantConnect.Roh
to the same appropriate directory on the New-Server. On your new installation this directory must exist
already!
Step 5. Copy the files
../PGIM/PlantConnect.bin/Server/DBRestart.bin
and
../PGIM/PlantConnect.bin/Server/Pob.bin
to the same appropriate directory on the New-Server.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 209

PGIM 5
Step 6: If you need to change the hostname, this is now the time to disconnect the Old-Server and
replace it with the New-Server – change the hostname on the New-Server to the Old-Server’s
hostname.
Step 7: Start on the New-Server the PGIM server service. You are done. You have successfully
replaced the Old-Server.
4.8.3 Update procedure for “hostname does change“

This procedure implies that the new computer will have an new hostname which is different from the
old computer. ScanManagers on the server node are not allowed for this upgrade procedure.
Step 1: Install the base operating system software and tools. Give the New-Server a new hostname.
Step 2: Install the New-Server with the PGIM server software from the CD. Install the license file with
at least the capabilities as the Old-Server had. Do no configuration on the server itself. When you are
installing a client on this computer, then the client should already point to the New-Server’s hostname.
You are asked for the server name during the installation.
Step 3: On both the Old-Server and the New-Server stop the PGIM server services.
Step 4: Copy all data from
../PGIM/PlantConnect.Roh
to the same appropriate directory on the New-Server. On your new installation this directory must exist
already!
Step 5. Copy the files
../PGIM/PlantConnect.bin/Server/DBRestart.bin
and
../PGIM/PlantConnect.bin/Server/Pob.bin
to the same appropriate directory on the New-Server.
Step 6: Choose any PGIM client on your network (you will have to make these changes to all clients
any how). On that computer open up the registry editor and search for the key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/Hartmann&Braun/PlantConnect
In here you will find several keys at least the key “Licserver”: change all Old-Server hostnames to the
New-Server hostname.
Step 7: Start on the New-Server the PGIM server service.
Step 8: Now you need to reconnect all the signals to your new hostname. To do that, open a
SignalExplorer on the PGIM client where you have just changed the registry to your new PGIM-Server
hostname. Remove the old database. Connect the New-Server PGIM database by its hostname.
Step 9: You will see all your old signals with the status stopped (red) if you look into you server
neighborhood. Select all signals from the server neighborhood (make sure it is the server and NOT the
scanner!!!) and drag them over to start signals.
All your signals are now back in the server and connected. Please verify this with the signal explorer.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 210

PGIM 5
5 Logs and Reports

5.1 Introduction
PGIM uses an Add-In (PcLogs) for the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet routine in order to perform the
logging. PcLogs includes a sequence control (Scheduler) on which logs can cyclically be called, saved
and printed. The supplied templates (among others, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly logs)
demonstrate the diverse possibilities of implementation, and offer a solid basis for individual logs.
5.2 Installation of the Add-In

PcLogs is installed using the Excel Add-In-Manager. Select the entry Add-In-Manager in the Excel
main menu Extras. A dialog box shows all Add-Ins that are already available. To add the entry
"PcLogs", click on the Search button. You will find the file "PcLogs.xla" in the following folder:
<drive>:\PlantConnect.BIN\AddIns
Select the file and include with the Add-In-List. Click OK.
To integrate the Add-In in Excel, select the box on the left of "PcLogs". Quit the Add-In-Manager by
clicking OK. The new entry "Logs" will automatically be created in the Excel main menu.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 211

PGIM 5
5.3 The folder structure / Files

The following folders are important for logging:
Folder Contents
...\PlantConnect.BIN\AddIns PcLogs.xla, PcLogs.ini
...\PlantConnect.BIN\Logs Scheduler.xls, Scheduler.ini,
...\PlantConnect.BIN\Logs\Vorlagen Various templates for log creation
...\PlantConnect.Sys\Debug\PcLogs Debug files
PcLogs.xla
This file includes all formulas and dialogs required for the creation of logs.
PcLogs.ini
The settings made under the menu item "Options" are saved in this text file.
Scheduler.xls
This Excel workbook includes the Scheduler for the cyclic call of the logs.
Scheduler.ini
Here the Scheduler saves the data for the logs to be called cyclically.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 212

PGIM 5
5.4 Entries in the Ini-File

The following entries with their meaning, default assignment and possible values are stored in the INI
file (pclogs.ini).
Entry Description Default Values
Menu_Caption Entry in the Excel menu bar &Logs
Displaymode Acknowledge error on the screen False True;False
Offline_configuration Offline configuration False True;False
SignalExplorerFolder SignalExplorer folder <Path>
TemplatesFolder Templates folder <Path>
SchedulerPath Log scheduler folder <Path>
Rows_Colums_Autofit Automatically customize rows/columns False True;False
MultiScheduling MultiScheduling True True;False
Language Is set internally 1
Cooperate Use of an ext. DLL for matrix calculation active active;notactive
The INI file is available on the following path:

....\PlantConnect.BIN\AddIns
1KGD 400111 December 2006 213

PGIM 5
6 Trend
6.1 Signal Colors
The colors for the selected curves are assigned according to a standard. The color chart is used in
PGIM.
The color 90 is used for the first signal in the trend. Further signals in the trend use the color 90 + and
index value. This applies up until the 10th trend signal. The 11th signal begins again with the color
index 90.
Colors in PGIM are specified in the COLIDX.CSV file under... \PlantConnect.BIN\Client \.
6.2 Optional Columns in the Legend

The columns in the trend legend are specified in the PlaCo.ini file of the Clients in the
....\PlantConnect.BIN\Clients \ folder.
Optional adjustment:
A comment can be added to each signal in the trend.
The PlaCo.ini file is stored in the ...PlantConnect.bin\client folder. To add another column add this
entry under the [ TREND ATTRIBUTE ]:
reference = _ COMMENT, 100
The entry can be edited in the legend. The information in this field is also stored in the trend.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 214

PGIM 5
6.3 Context Menu

From a trend it is possible to hand the selected signal over as a parameter to another application.
For example:
- User A would like to receive this information for a selected signal in a curve display:
- What is the full text? When is the signal stored? What is the memory rate of the signal? Etc..
- User B would like to see the monthly average values for the previous year in an Excel diagram.
- User C would like to find and list all analog signals.
The goal is to call foreign applications using the context menu, then to hand the selected signal over
as a parameter. The foreign application must evaluate the parameter file CMD.INI and insert the
desired functionality.
The basic conditions for this goal are available in PGIM.
For example the foreign applications which can be started are called AppA.BAT, AppB.XLS, and
AppC.EXE. In the PlaCo.INI file you can make the following entries under the section
[GEDContextMenu]:
[GEDContextMenu]
Browse auxiliary info.... = AppA.VBS
Previous year month means = AppB.XLS
Search similar signals... = AppC.EXE
There are now three new menu options within the context menu (using the right mouse) in the display
for each signal:
Browse auxiliary info....
- previous year month means
- Search similar signals...
Select one of these points and the appropriate foreign application is started.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 215

PGIM 5
The program "AppA.VBS" keeps the information in the "CMD.INI" for the selected signal. This file has
the following structure:
[Tags]
A1=\\MIP311\SM\HyperPIMS\3D_Z
[Common]
CalledFrom=D:\PIMS\PlantConnect\new Trend 3.crv
ScreenPosX=510
ScreenPosY=509
TimePoint=18.06.2001 17:36:28.224
StartTime=14.02.2001 13:02:01.000
EndTime=14.02.2001 13:02:01.000
<CalledFrom> shows from which PlaCo application one called
.<ScreenPosX><ScreenPosY> the mouse position at the selection time (this can be interesting for
applications to open further windows)
<TimePoint> Time of action
<StartTime><EndTime> The start and end time in the case of a trend.
The foreign application must evaluate the parameters in this CMD.INI file, and then trigger further
actions.
6.3.1 Some Signals marked at the same Time

Context menus can be faded in as a function of the number of selected signals: It can be
differentiated as:
· 1 signal selected,
· 2 signals selected,
· 3 signals selected,
· >3 signals selected.
For each of these cases you can add an extra a section in the PlaCo.INI:
[1ANumContextMenu]
[2ANumContextMenu]
[3ANumContextMenu]
[nANumContextMenu]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 216

PGIM 5
Example: · I would like to be able to always start AppA, and determine how many signals are selected.
- Additionally I would like to be able to start a correlation analysis, if exactly 2 signals are selected.
- If exactly 3 are selected, I would like to be able to open a 3D-Picture.
The configuration in the PlaCo.INI would look like this:
[1ANumContextMenu]
[2ANumContextMenu]
correlation... = Korrela.XLS
[3ANumContextMenu]
[nANumContextMenu]
3D-Graphic = Do3DView.EXE
The information to the selected signals is added along with several signals into the CMD.INI.
6.4 NLSTimeFormatID in GED.Settings

PlaCo.INI can have a key in the GED.SETTINGS section:
GED.Settings]
NLSTimeFormatID=GB
NLSTimeFormat controls the time format, used in trend and GED.
supported values and formats:
NLSTimeFormat=GER tt.mm.yyyy hh:mm:ss.nnn (default)
NLSTimeFormat=US mm.tt.yyyy hh:mm:ss.nnn
NLSTimeFormat=GB mm.tt.yyyy hh:mm:ss.nnn am/pm
NLSTimeFormat=SE 2005-mm-tt hh:mm:ss.nnn
1KGD 400111 December 2006 217

PGIM 5
7 AutoMail
PGIM AutoMail is a program which continuously monitors particular folders. As soon as files and/or
further subdirectories appear in such a folder, they will automatically be sent as attachment to an e-
mail generated automatically. Each file will be sent by means of an e-mail.
IMPORTANT: The subdirectories of the monitored folder and the files will be deleted after they have
been sent.
Therefore you must take care that the right folders are selected and/or that the folders are filled
correctly (e.g. by copying) in order to prevent the deletion of important originals.
AutoMail works in the background and supports SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol).
7.1 Installation and Configuration
To install AutoMail mark the „AutoMail“ option in the “Tools” menu of then PGIM setup.
On the first start of AutoMail the “Option” dialog appears: here you can make the base configuration of
AutoMail. This dialog can also be shown over the main menu “Extras” -> “Options”.
In this dialog the following fields must/can be entered:
1KGD 400111 December 2006 218

PGIM 5
from (name of sender) the name of the sender that appears in the e-mail optional
from (e-mail of the sender) the e-mail address of the sender
Subject the subject of the e-mail optional
Mail-Server the address of the SMTP Server that AutoMail uses
Login crossed if the SMTP Server needs an authentication
Username name of the user in the SMTP Server
Password password of the user in the SMTP Server
The standard port of a SMTP server is port 25. If another port must be used you can write the port
number behind the server separated by a “:” (e.g. mail.gmx.net:9025).
7.2 Manage AutoMail Tasks
In the main windows of AutoMail the tasks of the application are shown. A task is a “monitor” job of
AutoMail. That means that a task describe which folder AutoMail monitors and to which addresses
AutoMail send the files.
The icon of the tasks predicates if the task is active or not .

A active task monitors the specified folder and sends e-mails whenever a file is found in this folder.
The following actions can be done within the main window:
Exit AutoMail Main menu -> “File” -> “Exit” Terminates the application
Add a task Main menu -> “File” -> “Add” Adds a task to the AutoMail main window and
opens the Task Configuration dialog (s.
Or Right mouse menu -> “Add”
Chapter 5)
Delete a task Select task and Deletes the task from the main window. The
configured folder is no longer monitored.
Main menu -> “File” -> “Delete”
Or Select task and
Right mouse menu -> “Delete”
Edit a task Select task and Opens the Task Configuration dialog (s.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 219

PGIM 5
Main menu -> “File” -> “Edit” Chapter 5)
Or Select Task and
Right mouse menu -> “Edit”
Or double click task
Options Main menu -> “Extras” -> “Options” Opens the AutoMail Configuration (s. chapter
3)
7.3 Task Configuration
In a task configuration it is specified which folder (with its subfolders) is monitored and to which
address(es) the found files are sent.
A task configuration has the following fields:
Name The name of the task

Directory The name of the folder that is monitored
Active Specifies if the task is active or inactive
to A list of addresses where the found files are sent to (recipient list)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 220

PGIM 5
In the case of a new task (Add action in the main window) all fields are empty.
The folder to monitor can be set via the “…” button which opens a directory browser. In this browser
select the wanted directory and click the “OK” button.
With the checkbox “Active” you can specify if the task is active or not. Click in the box and the value
changes.
In the address list (recipient list) e-mail addresses can be added and deleted. To add an e-mail
address click in the list then open the right mouse menu and select “Add”. Another list will appear
where you can select an e-mail address and transfer it to the recipient list with the “Add to folder”
button. For more information about the e-mail list please refer to the next chapter. To delete an e-mail
from the list select the name field then open the right mouse menu and select “Delete”.
7.4 E-mail List
All e-mail addresses are collected and can be managed in a separate list. You can achieve this list via
the task configuration when adding an e-mail in the address list (s. Chapter 5). In the e-mail list e-mail
addresses can be added, deleted and selected for the transfer to the address list of the task
configuration.
In the e-mail list you can find a name and an address field.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 221

PGIM 5
To add a new e-mail address to the list click in the list then open the right mouse menu and select
“Add”. Then a dialog appears in which you can edit the name and the e-mail address for this entry.
The same dialog appears when you want to edit an entry. Therefore select a name then open the right
mouse menu and select “Edit”.
To delete an entry, select a name then open the right mouse menu and select “Delete”.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 222

PGIM 5
8 WebClient
8.1 Introduction
PGIM can be accessed from the Internet.
A WebClient is a normal PGIM-Client-PC with a correspondingly configured WebRouting.INI file.
All normal PGIM functions (Navigator, User Manager, SignalExplorer, GED, Trend, Logs, and TecBer)
may communicate via the internet server according to the WebRouting.INI.
A WebClient can continue to access the PGIM servers simultaneously available on the Intranet.
There is one difference with the WebClient. PGIM ScanManagers cannot be contacted via the
Internet. Consequently, the following message is displayed in the SignalExplorer during the "System
Update": "Cannot reach ScanDriver XY".
1KGD 400111 December 2006 223

PGIM 5
8.2 Function of WebClients

PGIM clients by default communicate with the PGIM server via TCP/IP.
To be exact: Via the TCP/IP port 4242, which usually is fully available in the Intranet.
If you want to access a PGIM server in the Internet using a PGIM client, there will usually be the
following restrictions:
The office client along with the remote PGIM server are both placed in an individual Intranet, in
most cases each behind a firewall which usually does not permit a direct TCP/IP communication.
This is aggravated by the fact that Proxy firewalls are mostly used. They only let the HTTP protocol
through on a special TCP/IP port (usually port 80). Due to these so-called protocol filters, a real IP
connection is not available.
In order to allow a PGIM client to communicate via the Internet with a server it is possible to expand
the communication for the PGIM client by using a corresponding configuration (INI file) for the HTTP
Proxy operation. The configuration file defines the Proxy through which the client will reach a server,
as well as the respective server to be reached.
A client operation beyond the limits of the Intranet (WebClient) will be as follows:
[WebClient XY] can simultaneously access PGIMServer A and B!

TCP/IP-Intranet Company XY
[MYFW:8080] Firewall from Company XY of the client
Internet
[FirewallA] [FirewallB]
TCP/IP-Intranet Company A TCP/IP-Intranet Company B

[PGIMServerA] [PGIMServerB]
1KGD 400111 December 2006 224

PGIM 5
8.3 Configuration of WebClient

In the case of the WebClient, the file WebRouting.INI (on the ...PlantConnect.Bin\cfg folder) must be
configured for the servers to be reached via the Internet. All local servers will then become reachable.
A client will get into the Internet via the HttpProxyFirewall from their own company (let name be:
MYFW, let port be: 8080). The firewall supports host authentication. Let login name be "Mustermann",
let password be "karin".
For example, assume that for Company A, a PGIM server is available which is known in the Internet
as PGIMServerA. For Company B, assume a PGIM server is available which is known in the Internet
as PGIMServerB.
The client would like to address these servers using the names CompA and CompB.
The structure of the sample file WebRouting.INI:

[CompA]
Proxy=MYFW
ProxyPort=8080
ServerIP=PGIMServerA
HostAuthentication=Mustermann:karin
[CompB]
Proxy=MYFW
ProxyPort=8080
ServerIP=PGIMServerB
HostAuthentication=Mustermann:karin
NOTE:
If no HostAuthentication is required, the entry "must" be exactly "HostAuthentication=dummy", i.e. the
entry must not be dummy.
After that, the SignalExplorer may be started and the servers "CompA" and "CompB" can be added.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 225

PGIM 5
8.4 PGIM Server in the Internet

The PGIM server is installed as usual.
The firewall configuration must be set by the responsible administrator in order to integrate the PGIM
server into the network. It must be possible to let through incoming HTTP requests on port 80 to the
PGIM server, and to answer such requests.
In the license file, the desired number of permitted WebClients must be set in the [Server] section:
WebClients=xx (please ask for the licenses at ABB).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 226

PGIM 5
9 Backup hints
9.1 Introduction
This document describes the procedure for backup and recovery of a PGIM installation on a computer.
The first section describes the backup performed in single steps. A solution for backup and recovery of
the overall system is presented in the last section.
It is the task of the system administrator to ensure that the data is saved at regular intervals to the
extent necessary. The data should also be deposited in a safe place. The system administrator and/or
the company must bear the responsibility.
This description includes notes on the backup of the operating system and its components. No
warranty is given for the correctness of this information. The backup of the operating system is not the
primary task of this manual, and it is only mentioned for the sake of completeness. The system
administrator and/or the company are responsible for correct backups.
9.1.1 Requirements and Preparations

For the backup, a suitable device and medium must be available.
The marginal conditions guaranteed by the manufacturer of the device and/or of the medium must
be observed.
The data integrity guaranteed by the manufacturer of the device and/or of the medium must be
observed.
Usually, administrator rights are required.
9.1.2 Backup Tools

For the backup and recovery of software installations, different systems are available on the market.
We here with explicitly declare that no warranty can be given by ABB for the correct functioning of
such tools.
For example, the "DriveImage" program from the Power Quest company is available. By means of this
program, the data can, for example, also be burnt on a CD if a CD burner is available. The system
also offers the possibility to create incremental backups. In any case, the instructions and notes
relating to the tool must be observed.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 227

PGIM 5
9.2 Windows Operating System
9.2.1 Backup
After the installation and after an update, even of single components, a backup of the operating
system must be performed by suitable means. Ensure that the tool being used will also copy and save
all settings (Registry, opened files, ...). If necessary, the system must be brought down.
Appropriate tools are available on the market.
In any case, the settings in the hard disk manager of the operating system must be recorded and
deposited at a safe place. They are required for a restoration of the system.
If a backup is not possible, all inputs made during the installation/update must be recorded exactly,
and deposited at a safe place. All data media (for example CD drivers) required for the
installation/update must also be secured and deposited. Magnetic data media (for example floppies)
only have a limited shelf life. Their contents must be refreshed in time.
9.2.2 Recovery
The recovery of the operating system is carried out according to the instructions of the backup tool
being used.
If no backup could be created, a reinstallation must be performed. For this, the recordings of the
installation/update and the corresponding data media (for example CD drivers) are required.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 228

PGIM 5
9.3 Office Applications and Other Tools
9.3.1 Backup
After the installation and after an update, even of single components, a backup of the Office
applications and of other tools must be performed by suitable means. Ensure that the tool being used
will also copy and save all settings (Registry, opened files, ...). If necessary, the system must be
brought down.
9.3.2 Recovery
The recovery of the Office applications and of other tools is carried out according to the instructions of
the backup tool being used.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 229

PGIM 5
9.4 PGIM Server
9.4.1 Backup of Basic Installation

After the installation and after an update, even of single components, a backup of the PGIM server
must be performed by suitable means. Ensure that the tool being used will also copy and save all
settings (Registry, opened files, ...). If necessary, the system must be brought down.
If a backup is not possible, all inputs made during the installation/update must exactly be recorded and
deposited at a safe place. These settings can also be documented with the aid of the Dr. PGIM tool
which is included in the scope of supply beginning in version 2.5. Dr. PGIM can create a report of
backup information that must be kept at a safe place.
All data media (for example CD drivers) required for the installation/update must also be secured and
deposited. Magnetic data media (for example floppies) only have a limited shelf life. Their contents
must be refreshed in time.
9.4.2 Recovery of Basic Installation

The recovery of the PGIM server is carried out according to the instructions of the backup tool being
used.
9.4.3 Backup of Continuously Changing Data

The process described above is used for the backup of all data after the installation and after an
update, even of single components of the software package. During the operation, however, data is
continuously added, removed or changed. There are, for example:
Configuration data of the scanners
Configuration data of the server
Measured value archives
Settings
Curve displays
Graphic displays
Logs
...
By means of the PGIM Ex/Import tool, an automatic backup of this data can be performed during
running operation (for example once per day in the night). The full scope of this feature is available
from PGIM version 3.0. In the case of previous versions, a few data elements must be saved manually
after they have been changed.
Handling and functions of the PGIM Ex/Import tool are described in the manual.
9.4.4 Recovery of Continuously Changing Data

The data which has changed during the continuous operation of PGIM and saved with the aid of the
PGIM Ex/Import tool, must be imported again after a reinstallation or recovery of PGIM.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 230

PGIM 5
The Ex/Import tool supports this work, and ensures that all data will be integrated again in the correct
place in the system. Depending on the scope of data, this process may take quite a long time.
9.4.5 PGIM Folder Structure

PGIM is copied to the installation folder by the installation program. You must indicate the folder
location during the installation. If you are not sure where PGIM is installed, the following folders should
be saved periodically and restored if required:
<Installation path>\PlantConnect
<Installation path>\PlantConnect.BIN
<Installation path>\PlantConnect.Sys
<Installation path>\PlantConnect\Events
9.5 PGIM Scanner

PGIM has the ability to install scanners on separate computers. In this case, a backup of these
computers must also be carried out as described above.
9.6 PGIM Client

PGIM has the ability to install the clients on separate computers. In that case, a backup of these
computers must also be carried out as described above.
9.7 Event Management
9.7.1 Backup of Basic Installation

After the installation and after an update, even of single components, a backup of the Event
Management including its database must be performed by suitable means. Ensure that the tool being
used will copy and save all settings (Registry, opened files, ...).
9.7.2 Recovery of Basic Installation

The recovery of the Event Management and of the database is carried out according to the
instructions of the backup tool being used.
9.7.3 Backup of Continuously Changing Data
1KGD 400111 December 2006 231

PGIM 5
The process described above is used for the backup of all data after the installation of the software
package. During the operation, however, data are continuously added, removed or changed. These
are, for example:
Configuration data of the scanners
Event archives
Settings
...
By means of the PGIM Ex/Import tool, an automatic backup of this data can be performed during
running operation (for example once per day in the night). The full scope of this feature is available
from PGIM version 3.0. In the case of previous versions, a few data elements must be saved manually
after they have been changed.
Handling and functions of the PGIM Ex/Import tool are described in the manual.
9.7.4 Recovery of Continuously Changing Data

The data which has changed during the continuous operation of PGIM and saved with the aid of the
PGIM Ex/Import tool, must be imported again after a reinstallation or recovery of PGIM.
The Ex/Import tool supports this work, and ensures that all data will be integrated again in the correct
place in the system. Depending on the scope of data, this process may take quite a long time.
9.8 Complete Backup and Recovery
9.8.1 Backup
As an alternative to the single steps described above for the backup of software packages and basic
installation, the backup procedure can also be performed in one step using an appropriate tool after all
partial packages (operating system, Office applications, other tools, PGIM and Event Management)
have been installed. Usually, a so-called image backup of the hard disk(s) will then be created.
For this, the instructions of the backup tool must be followed. If necessary, the system must be
brought down.
In any case, the continuously changing data of PGIM and of the Event Management must be saved as
described above using the PGIM Ex/Import tool.
9.8.2 Recovery
If a backup of the overall system has been performed using one tool, it is possible to restore the
system after a failure using the same tool.
For this, the instructions of the backup tool must be followed. If necessary, the system must be
brought down.
In any case, the continuously changing data of PGIM and of the Event Management must be restored
as described above using the PGIM Ex/Import tool.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 232

PGIM 5
10 Ex/Import-Manager
10.1 Introduction
The program ExIm.exe is used to save the archived data stored in the PGIM database. It can either be
used for backup purposes, or for moving the data to external media. It is also possible to use this
program to delete the oldest data on the hard disk.
For data storage hardware normally a magneto-optical drive with the respective media is used. The
drive may be included in the PGIM server PC, connected to it as an external device or it may be
reachable via a network connection. For any drive where it is possible to read and write like a hard
disc, it is also possible to use this drive for data storage.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 233

PGIM 5
10.2 Installation
For the installation of the PGIM ExImport tool, the entry "ExImport" must be selected from the tools in
the PGIM Setup. The program is installed as a service and will be available under the name "PGIM
ExImport" in the list of services. During the runtime of the program, an icon in the system taskbar
refers to the program. It is possible to execute the program from the taskbar.
10.2.1 Initialization file

The initialization file ...\PlantConnect.BIN\ExIm\ExImport.ini contains the general settings of the PGIM
ExImport:
[Export]
SingleOpDelayMilliSec= Delay between the processing of two signals
EventServer= Name of the Event Server
EventMsgRepeatAfterMinutes=60 Delay time to wait before repeating the sending of messages to the
event server
DailyExportStart=04:00 Daily start time for the export.
DebugLevel=0 Level for the debug outputs:
0 means few outputs
5 means many outputs
(The default value is 0.)
[ShellProgram] Automatic call of any program when the capacity limit of the
export medium has been reached.
ProgName= Name of the program to be called.
ProgPath= Path to the program to be called.
ProgParameter= Call parameter for the program to be executed.
[ServerDataRoots]
DEUTAMINW1035=f:\ROH\ Folder for the PGIM archive data.
[SQLTasks]
WaitForExcecuteInSeconds=2000 Waiting time until the SQL server command has been executed
(Time out).
EventImportPath = If the entry is empty or not available, "PGIM-System path
\PlantConnect.BIN\Events\Import\" is entered for the path of the
EventImport-Ini file.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 234

PGIM 5
11 AutoUpdate
11.1 Introduction
The PGIM product is continuously improved to achieve the best possible functionality and operator
convenience. PGIM AutoUpdate can be used to distribute new versions of the product easily;
particularly in plants with several client installations.
PGIM setup files are saved on a central HTTP or FTP server. PGIM AutoUpdate is installed on each
client, and the address of the server is configured.
PGIM AutoUpdate copies the setup files to the individual clients, then automatically installs the
transmitted product version on these computers. Whenever PGIM is started on a client, PGIM
AutoUpdate will check whether a new version exists on a configured server. If there is a new version
available, you receive a notification. You can then choose to automatically update the PGIM version.
This ensures that the latest PGIM version is available on all clients of a plant.
Moreover, PGIM AutoUpdate also allows the installation of a new PGIM client via the FTP/HTTP
server.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 235

PGIM 5
11.2 Preconditions
PGIM AutoUpdate uses the HTTP or FTP protocol for transmitting the new versions. For this reason,
the existence of an FTP server or Web server (HTTP) is required.
An HTTP or FTP server is not included in the scope of supply, but by default Microsoft supplies
a FTP server with Win 2000 as a component of Internet Information Services IIS.
A freeware FTP server may also be used. The freeware server GuildFTPd, for example, has proved to
be sufficient for the purposes of PGIM AutoUpdate.
On the installed server, an update folder (for example ...PIMS\PlantConnect.SETUP) must be created
and released for all accessing clients. In this folder, the PGIM setup CD and information files are
saved (see Chapter 11.6).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 236

PGIM 5
11.3 Installation of AutoUpdate

PGIM AutoUpdate must be installed on each client computer to which automatic updates are to be
transmitted. The installation of PGIM AutoUpdate can be performed on a client where an installation of
PGIM already exists as well as on a PC where an installation of PGIM does not yet exist.
Execute AutoUpdateSetup.exe to start the installation. If the installation is performed on a new client,
a target path must be indicated (it is appropriate to choose the same path which will also be used for a
PGIM installation).
If PGIM has already been installed, the setup program automatically selects the PGIM folder. After the
installation, the configuration view of PGIM AutoUpdate is displayed. In this view, all PGIM
AutoUpdate parameters can be set. You will find a detailed description of the configuration possibilities
in the next section "Administration".
If a file server has been set up and is accessible via the HTTP/FTP protocol, the PGIM AutoUpdate
installation can be loaded and executed using a simple starter program (deliverable on disk; minimum
requirement: Internet Explorer 4.01). In this case you must indicate the URL of the PGIM setup on the
server, and click Start after the Starter.exe has been triggered.
An installation can also be performed manually via the available standard FTP program. After having
initiated the prompt, start the FTP program and download the AutoUpdateSetup.exe file from the FTP
server. Then execute AutoUpdateSetup.exe. The same procedure (download or direct execution of
the AutoUpdateSetup.exe file) can also be carried out in the same manner using the Internet Explorer
(HTTP basis).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 237

PGIM 5
11.4 Administration of PGIM AutoUpdate

All the necessary parameters can be set in the PGIM AutoUpdate configuration view. It is also
possible to access the settings of other clients in the network. This enables central administration.
Except at the initial start, the configuration view is protected after installation by the password optimax.
The PGIM AutoUpdate configuration view:
The different fields show the current configuration of the client which has been selected in the Select
Client for Configuration field.
Click Add new Client to input the name or the IP number of a new client. Click OK. The system
checks if the client is reachable within the network, and whether PGIM AutoUpdate has been installed.
The client can only be found if PGIM AutoUpdate has been installed.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 238

PGIM 5
Client configurations can be displayed by selecting a client from the list. The following information is
displays about the PGIM software installed on the selected client:
The Current Version of the PGIM software is displayed.
The PGIM Path indicates the installation path of the software.
In the Installed Components view all installed modules of PGIM software are listed.
You can make the following settings in AutoUpdate Settings:
Use "Local Path" to select the folder to be used by AutoUpdate to save the setup file. It is
important that these folders already exist. Otherwise, no files can be transmitted from the
HTTP/FTP server.
Use "Select Protocol" to select the protocol which the server will use to transmit the setup files.
"ftp/http Server location" indicates the path of the folder where the setup files are residing on the
server. Click the Check Server Connection button to check the input, and also to find the version
number of the PGIM software available on the server. If the test is successful, the message
"Connection OK" appears, and the version of the PGIM software on the server is displayed in the
field "Available Update Version on Server". If not, the message "Connection failed" will be
displayed. If the test fails, this may have the following causes.
The folder in the field "Local Path" does not exist.
The path in the field "ftp/http Server location" is not identical to the path on the server.
Click Write Settings to Client to update and save the settings.
You can create a Collection of Clients to avoid changing each client individually. By pressing the
Edit Collection of Clients button you can add a client into the collection or to remove it from the list.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 239

PGIM 5
In the "Known Clients" list all clients are shown that have been added with the Add new Client
button. A new client can only be added if a PGIM AutoUpdate has been installed on this client. By
marking the clients in the list Known Clients and pressing the >> button these clients will be added to
the Selected Clients list. To remove clients from the list Selected Clients you must select the clients
and press the << button.
Click the Apply button acknowledge changes to the list.

After all the clients have been included into the Collection list, press the Write Settings to Collection
button:
For the clients in the "Collection", only those parameters will be applied which have been selected.
An update of the client can also be initiated immediately by selecting the Update localhost button in
the configuration view. This also allows reinstalling a PGIM client. However, this is only possible for
the "localhost" (i.e. the local client). You must ensure that the executed update is a full setup ( *.*.0).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 240

PGIM 5
11.5 AutoUpdate on PGIM Clients

If a new PGIM version is available on the server, the following notification is shown when the PGIM
client is started:
You can decide whether you want to install the new version right now or later. If you decide not to
perform an update now, you will be asked again when starting the PGIM client next time. For detailed
information about the update, an information document is available by clicking the Readme button:
To ensure an optimum functionality and operator convenience, the update should be performed in all
cases. The update executes completely without further user inputs. It only takes a few minutes.
If the PGIM client is closed only on rare occasions, the availability of a new PGIM version can be
checked manually. On the taskbar select Start, Programs, PGIM, PGIM Update to perform an update
if possible.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 241

PGIM 5
11.6 Files in the Update Folder of the File Server

The following files reside in the released folder of a PGIM AutoUpdate file server:
File name Meaning

Setup.inf Information file with version number and details about the
setup files
Setup.exe Startup file of the PGIM setup (updates)
Setup.W01 – Setup.W** Follow-up files of the PGIM setup (updates)
Readme.html Readme in HTML format
Logo.gif ABB logo
*.txt Check file
AutoUpdateSetup.exe Setup of the PGIM AutoUpdate
1KGD 400111 December 2006 242

PGIM 5
11.7 Sample Installations

In this chapter, the procedure for the installation of PGIM AutoUpdate is demonstrated using an
example.
11.7.1 Setup of the FTP server

For the FTP server, a desktop PC with Pentium processor and Windows 2000 or later is used.
Within the network, the name "MyFTP" was assigned to this PC. On this PC, the FTP server software
GuildFTPd (freeware) was installed. GuildFTPd can be downloaded from the following Internet
address: http://www.nitrolic.com/dwnload/GuildFTPd.exe.
With the installation of AutoUpdate, a new folder (....\PIMS\PlantConnect.SETUP) is created. Then the
PGIM setup files were copied to this folder (see Chapter 6). In the server software, the sub-folder
....\PIMS\PlantConnect.SETUP\PlantConnect\bin has been released on the virtual path
/PlaCoNewVersion for all clients (Anonymous).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 243

PGIM 5
11.7.2 Setup of clients
11.7.2.1 First example

This client is a desktop PC with Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 5.5 and PGIM. Because the client
meets the minimum requirements for the AutoUpdateInstaller, the respective file
(AutoUpdateSetup.exe) must be executed. The file is installed as an addition to PGIM. Above
mentioned executable file could be downloaded from the FTP-Server in a known way (already
described in previous sections) from the virtual path /PlaCoAutoUpgradeInstall for this client
(Anonymous).
It’s recommended to download the file into sub-folder called ....\PIMS\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools and to
start it from this location. The installation begins with a welcome message. Select the option "Install
with Administration Tool" and finish the setup.
The AutoUpdateSetup terminates, and the configuration view is displayed:
Due to the fact that the PGIM version was already installed, and the AutoUpdateInstaller was used for
the installation, changes to the settings are not necessary now.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 244

PGIM 5
11.7.2.2 Second example

This client was a desktop PC with Windows 2000, Internet Explorer 6, but without PGIM software.
Because the PC does not meet the minimum requirements for the AutoUpdateInstaller, the
AutoUpdateSetup.exe had to be downloaded manually from the server. For that purpose, in this
example the Internet Explorer was launched and the address of the server and the name of the setup
file were entered into the address field.
For example: ftp://MyFTP/PlaCoAutoUpdateInstall/AutoUpdateSetup.exe
In the File Download dialog you can save the program to disk, or you can run the program from its
current location.
Select the option "Run this program from its current location". A security warning is displayed. Click
Yes. The download will begin and AutoUpdateSetup is launched.
During the setup, the installation path indicates where PGIM will be installed later.
The installation begins with a welcome message. Select the option "Install with Administration Tool"
and finish the setup.
In this case, PGIM AutoUpdate was installed on the path C:\PIMS.
After the installation, the configuration view of PGIM AutoUpdate was displayed.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 245

PGIM 5
Only the "ftp/http Server location" needs to be indicated here.

In this case, it was ftp://MyFTP/PlaCoNewVersion. Pressing the Check Server Connection button
checks the input and simultaneously the version number of the PGIM software on the server that is
displayed in the field Available Update Version on Server.
Because PGIM has not yet been installed, a version must be selected. Select a version where the last
digit is zero. Only these versions are complete setups. For example 3.5.0 is complete, but 3.5.1 is only
a Service Pack for the previous version.
Click the Update localhost button to download the setup files.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 246

PGIM 5
12 PGIM Report Scheduler

The PGIM Report Scheduler program is a program for executing PGIM reports.
The program can cyclically or event driven start a PGIM report
The PGIM Report Scheduler can be started with the windows Service Control Manager.
Description:
: Starts/Stop the automatic
: Adds a new report entry
: Removes a report entry
: Save the additional job list
Tab “Entrys” : Displays all configured reports
Tab “Jobqueue” : Displays all current jobs
Tab “Additional jobs” : Displays all additional jobs
Tab “Debug messages” : Displays the latest progam messages
1KGD 400111 December 2006 247

PGIM 5
12.1 Configuration of a scheduler item

To add a new Report to then PGIM Report Scheduler , press the button in the toolbar or select in the menu
“Entry” -> “New Entry…”
The following display is opend:
3.1 Description:
Entry name : The name of the Excel-Report ( will be set automatic )
Exec path : The full qualified Excel-Report file
Parameter : Additional start parameter ( optional )
Button „Edit“ : The button „Edit“ opens the report
Button „Cancel“ : The button „Cancel” close the dialog without saving
Button „Save“ : The button „Save“ close the dialog with saving
IMPORTANT: The first time that you use the report scheduler under a service account, you
must open the Report with the “Edit” button after you have chosen your report it in the exec
path line. Excel will ask you this first time for your initials and you MUST answer this question
once to run the service later on in a service account.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 248

PGIM 5
3.2 Description tab “Time control”
This is the configuration tab for the cyclically execution of a PGIM report
Activ : Activates/deactivates the cyclically execution
Time priority : Set the priority for this report ( 1: high priority ;5: low priority)
Next run : Sets the date for the next execution of the configured report
Cycle : Sets the cycle for the execution
Delay : Sets the delay (in seconds ) . The PGIM Report Scheduler waits
for this time, before executing the report
Last Start : Activates/deactivates the last start option
Last Run : Sets the date for the last execution of the configured report
Report start : Sets the next date for the report

e.g.:
Next run : 20/01/2006 00:00
Cycle : 1 Day
Report start : 10/01/2006 00:00
The report will be executed from 20.Jan 06 every day at 00:00
The timestamp for the report will be set 10 days before
Interval : This value is always equal to the cycle time
1KGD 400111 December 2006 249

PGIM 5
3.3 Description tab “Event control”
This is the configuration tab for the event driven execution of a PGIM report
Activ : Activates/deactivates the event driven execution
Event priority : Set the priority for this report ( 1: high priority ;5: low priority)
Begin scan at : Sets the date for the next scan interval
Stop event scan : Activates/deactivates the last scan option
Stop scan at : Sets the date for the last scan of the configured report
Exec. Delay : Sets the delay (in seconds ) . The PGIM Report Scheduler waits
for this time after getting an event, before executing the report
1KGD 400111 December 2006 250

PGIM 5
To configure signals for an event driven execution, Drag&Drop a database signal from the
SignalExplorer ( not in service mode ) or write a full qualified PGIM item in the datagrid.
Type : Rising / Falling / Both ( for binary signals )
Rising:
Starts the report, if the signal value changed from “0” to “1”
Falling:
Starts the report, if the signal value changed from “1” to “0”
Both:
Starts the report, if the signal value changed
>Limit / <Limit ( for analogue signals )
>Limit:
Starts the report, if the signal value is lager then the configured limit
value
<Limit:
Starts the report, if the signal value is smaller then the configured limit
value
Limit : Limit value
Current value : the button “Current value” read the values for the signals at the “Begin scan at”
timestamp and displays them in the datagrid
Clear : the button “Clear” deletes all configured signals in the datagrid
1KGD 400111 December 2006 251

PGIM 5
12.2 Configuration of additional jobs
To configure or modify a new addition job, double-click on one additional job.

Following display occurs:
Report start : Sets the start for the report
Report end : Sets the end for the report
Report activation : Sets the date for the report execution
Report : The full qualified Excel-Report file
Priority : Set the priority for this report ( 1: high priority ;5: low
priority)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 252

PGIM 5
12.3 Options
The menu “Settings/Configuration” opens the configuration dialogue
Autostart : En/Disable the autostart of the PGIM Report Scheduler after the startup
Scan cycle : Set the scan cycle for the event driven execution
Job folder : Temporary folder, to save the current executing reports
Web-Job folder : Temporary folder for extra jobs from the PGIM WebClient
IIS root path : Root path for the Microsoft Internet Information Server
( Optional, if using PGIM WebClient )
1KGD 400111 December 2006 253

PGIM 5
13 Additional Programs
13.1 ASCII-Export
13.1.1 Introduction
The program PlaCoExport.exe is used to read information (signal descriptions as well as measured
values) from the PGIM databases and store this incorporation in files.
The format of the files depends on the application for which the file is created. Applications using
these files are, for example, the data reconciliation program "ConVali" (VALI III), or the lifetime
monitoring program "ConLife".
The amount of information that will be stored in the file as well as the format of the file is defined in a
configuration file that must be given as a parameter when the program is started.
13.1.2 Installation
To install the program the file PlaCoExport.exe and the respective configuration file (for example
"ConLife.txt") must be copied into the subfolder "PlaCoExport". This subfolder must be created in the
"PlantConnect.bin" folder.
In order to make the start of the program as easy as possible, the creation of a shortcut is
recommended. The following picture shows the properties of a shortcut for PlaCoExport to create files
for ConLife.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 254

PGIM 5
13.2 External Scheduler (legacy)
13.2.1 Introduction
The program PcSched.exe provides administration features for other programs that do not belong
directly to PGIM, but run in parallel to the scanning and analyzing programs of PGIM.
If you have never used this program, please refer to the section “PGIM Scheduler” instead of using
this program.
Those other programs may be developed by the customer, or may be special interface programs.
Normally those programs read the stored values from the PGIM databases, process these values and
perhaps write back results to the PGIM databases.
The external programs can be started once or cyclically with configurable cycles. The execution can
be automatically triggered by the configuration values or by an event (for example the changing of a
binary signal in one of the PGIM-ScanManagers).
Two types of programs can be started:
NT-batch files (Extension ".bat",".vbs","js",etc.)
Executable programs (Extension ".exe")
The programs to be started run in the background as separate applications. In this case no interaction
with the user is possible. Therefore the input parameters for the programs must be stored in a
configuration file. If the started program runs in the foreground interactions are possible via the
keyboard or the mouse.
13.2.2 Installation
The installation is carried out automatically after starting the program Setup.exe on the delivered
installation CD.
13.2.2.1 Files required for the installation

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before the installation of the PGIM Scheduler can start:
The following files must be available in the system folder:
PSAPI.DLL
PLACOOLE.DLL
PLANTCON.DLL
RWREGVALS.DLL
13.2.2.2 Files required for the access to PGIM

The file SCANMANAPI.DLL enables access to signals descriptions and values in the PGIM database.
The file PLANTCON.DLL establishes a TCP/IP connection to the PGIM server.
13.2.2.3 Files necessary for the access to the registry

The file RWREGVALS.DLL offers functions to read/write parameters from/to the registry of Windows.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 255

PGIM 5
1KGD 400111 December 2006 256

PGIM 5
13.3 System Router
13.3.1 Introduction
The program PGIM Router (or PCRouter for short) is used to exchange process values between
different ScanDrivers. This data exchange is needed if two or more stand-alone control systems must
exchange information. The program PCRouter allows you to transfer data from control system A to
control system B and vice versa.
The program establishes the communication between two or more ScanManagers, and starts an
event driven data exchange.
13.3.2 Installation
The installation of the PGIM Router must be selected as an option of the tools during the installation of
the PGIM software. During the installation the following folders are created to store the files.
<Installation folder>\PlantConnect.BIN\PCRouter
PCRouter.EXE
KonfiPCRouter.CSV
< Installation folder >\PlantConnect.SYS\Texte\Deutsch

PCRouter_dt.CSV
13.3.3 Structure
External
Editor
e.g.
Notepad
Configu-
PCRouter
ration file
ScanManager
Scandriver 1 ScanDriver 2
(e.g. Modbus) (e.g. P-Protocol)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 257

PGIM 5
13.3.4 Operation
The program PCRouter can be started by double-clicking the file "PCRouter.exe", or a link to this file.
PC Router can also be installed as a service. Then it is accessible from the windows services.
Before the data transfer can be started a configuration file must be selected. The configuration file can
be selected by typing the name of the file into the field "Module File" or by selecting the file from a file
selection dialog located besides the input field.
The configuration file can be created or modified from the program PCRouter. Therefore an editor
must be selected. The selection of the editor works in the same way as the selection of the
configuration file.
The settings concerning the editor as well as the configuration file are stored when the program is
stopped. Those settings are available for the next start of the program.
In order to modify the configuration file the click the Edit Configuration file button.
The field "Test signal" allows you to specify a single or several signals for which the data exchange is
shown on screen. For all signals that contain the defined string in their names the data exchange is
logged in the debug window, if the checkbox "Logging for Testsignal active" is selected.
The data transfer is started by selecting the "Start the Router" checkbox.
The selection of "Output in log file" starts the logging of all actions of the program. The logging should
be activated if problems occur during the data transfer. The log file is located in the folder:
< Installation folder >\PlantConnect.SYS\Debug\PCRouter.
13.3.5 Autostart / Initialization file

For an automatic start of the PCRouters follow these steps:
In the startup file for ALL users specify a link to the executable file PCRouter.Exe, for example with
the starting type "minimized".
An initialization file with the name "PCRouter.Ini" …\PlantConnect.BIN\PCRouter specifies the
following contents as ASCII files in the listing:
[ Application ]
AutoStart=1
With these two steps the PCRouter is always called whenever a user at the computer announces
itself.
You can also create an automatic logon. In this case the program will start after a restart of the
computer, for example after a voltage failure of the PCRouter.
The configuration file is structured by lines, each line containing a source and one or more sinks. The
columns are separated by semicolons. Each line starts with the type of the connection module. The
following types are possible:
Connect
DisConnectAlarm
ODER
2ZU1
1KGD 400111 December 2006 258

PGIM 5
13.3.6.1 Module Connect

The module "Connect" can be used to route the value from one input signal to up to 8 output signals.
Structure:
Column A Connect Keyword
Column B Module name unique identification of the connection, may only
exist once
Column C Number of input signals for this entry always 1
Column D Number of output signals 1-8
Column E Input signal Signal identification with the structure
\ScanManager\Scandriver\Signal
Column F Output signal 1 same as input signal
Column G Output signal 2 ...
Depending on the number of output signals)
Example:
Connect; Connect[Signal 1];1;2;\PCEAST\ep001e09\SIGNAL1;
\PCEAST\Modbus1\SIGNAL2;\PCWEST\Modbus2\SIGNAL3
PCRouter
Scanmanager PCEAST Scanmanager PCWEST

ep001e09 Modbus1 ep002e09 Modbus2
Signal1 Signal2 Signal3
13.3.6.2 Module DisConnectAlarm

This module allows you to check whether the connection to a special ScanDriver still works. A binary
signal is set to the value "1" if no new value is transferred by this special ScanDriver. The binary signal
is reset to the value "0" as soon as a new value comes from this ScanDriver.
Structure:
Column A DisConnectAlarm Keyword
exist once
Column C ScanManager Name of the ScanManager
Column D ScanDriver Name of the Scandriver
Column E Binärsignal Signal identification with the structure
1KGD 400111 December 2006 259

PGIM 5
Column F Timeout in seconds
Example:
DisConnectAlarm; PCWEST ;ep001e09 ;PCWEST\MODBUS\Alarm/XM41;9
13.3.6.3 Module ODER (OR)

With the module ODER an "OR" connection for up to 8 input signals can be generated. The result is
written to a single output signal.
Structure:
Column A ODER Keyword
exist once
Column C Number of input signals 1-8
Column D Number of output signals 1
Column E Input signal 1 Signal identification with the structure
(Column F Input signal 2 )
Column F Output signal 1 as input signal
Example:
ODER;Oder1;2;1;\PCEAST\ep001e09\SIGNAL1; ¬
\PCEAST\Modbus1\SIGNAL2;\PCWEST\Modbus2\SIGNAL3
PCRouter
1
Scanmanager PCEAST Scanmanager PCWEST

ep001e09 Modbus1 ep002e09 Modbus2
SIGNAL1 SIGNAL2 SIGNAL3
1KGD 400111 December 2006 260

PGIM 5
13.3.6.4 Module 2ZU1 (2 to 1)

The module 2ZU1 allows you to write two different constant values to the output signal, depending on the value
of the input signal. If the value of the input signal is "0" the first constant is written to the output signal. If the
value of the input signal is "1", the second constant is written to the output signal.
Structure:
Column A 2ZU1 Keyword
exist once
Column C Number of input signals 1
Column D Number of output signals 1
Column E Input signal 1 Signal identification with the structure
Column F Output signal 1 same as input signal
Column G Value 1 numerical value
Column H Value 2 numerical value
Example:
2ZU1;Bed[F0LAB50EE002/COA/POS];1;1;\PCEAST\Modbus1\F0LAB50EE002/COA/POS;\PCEAST\e
p001e09\F0LAB50EE002/ZA95;0;131
1KGD 400111 December 2006 261

PGIM 5
13.4 AutoMailer
13.4.1 Introduction
The idea of AutoMail is simple, but it offers power features for information sharing.
The basic problem is this: How can files in specific folders be automatically sent as e-mail attachments
to a specific e-mail address? For example, a report (which might have been generated automatically)
can be forwarded by e-mail to the responsible person. AutoMail presents a solution to this problem.
AutoMail is a program that continuously monitors particular folders. As soon as files and/or further
subfolders appear in these folders, they are automatically sent as attachments to an e-mail. The email
message is also generated automatically. Each file will be sent using an e-mail message.
IMPORTANT: The subfolders of the monitored folder and the files will be deleted after they
have been sent. Therefore you must take care that the correct folders are selected. Also make sure
that the folders are filled in correctly (for example by copying) in order to prevent the deletion of
important original files.
13.4.2 Installation
To install AutoMail from the CD execute Setup.exe. You are guided by an installation Wizard. When
starting AutoMail for the first time, your e-mail address, subject and mail server are required. These
details are important to ensure that the program runs correctly. They can also be entered in the
Options menu of the AutoMail main screen.
13.4.3 Structure
The folders from which the files will be sent are displayed in the AutoMail main screen. The names
indicated in the main window are logical names.
Select Options from the main window of AutoMail to find the information required for sending files.
You can delete folders and terminate AutoMail in the AutoMail main window. Use the Properties or
Add menus to create folders or to change properties of existing folders. You can set properties such
as folder names, folders, active addresses and e-mail addresses.
From these menus you can display commands like Explorer and E-mail addresses. Folders can be
selected in the Explorer. The E-mail addresses commands shows the e-mail addresses that are
available in the internal AutoMail database. You can delete e-mail addresses from the database. If you
want to change or add e-mail addresses in the database, you must use the Change or Add menus.
13.4.4 Procedure during configuration, start and stop

In this section you will find a short description how to use AutoMail procedures.
When starting AutoMail for the first time, you will be asked for the options (e-mail address, subject and
mail server) so that the files in the selected folders can be sent via e-mail.
Before sending files, however, folders must first be created in AutoMail. The "Create new folder"
section explains how to create folders in AutoMail.
When you first start AutoMail there are no e-mail addresses in the internal AutoMail database. The
"Add e-mail addresses in the internal AutoMail database" section describes how to create e-mail
addresses in the database. Only when the database includes e-mail addresses can you add e-mail
addresses to the individual folders in AutoMail.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 262

PGIM 5
Folder monitoring becomes active when you set the folders to be active, and you have closed the
Add or Properties menus.
If the AutoMail window is active you will be asked whether the files in the monitored folders should be
sent and deleted immediately. If the AutoMail dialog box is minimized (as icon in the task bar) the files
are sent and deleted immediately.
AutoMail should be started and installed only once.
To terminate AutoMail, you should set all folders to inactive before terminating in order to ensure a
reliable program run.
13.4.5 Operation
13.4.5.1 Setting Options

The folders from which the files shall be sent are displayed in the main screen. The names of the
folders shown are logical names which describe the required task.
Select Options from the Extras menu to set the options. Enter an e-mail address, a subject and a
mail server so that the e-mails can be sent with the files.
13.4.5.2 Create new folder

Select Add from the File menu to create a new folder. Enter a logical name for the folder. You can
also use the right mouse button (right-click) to select the Add command.
13.4.5.2.1 Set folder

To set a folder an existing folder name can be entered directly in the Folder text field. You can also
click the [...] button to use Windows Explorer to select a folder. Click OK to finish the selection.
13.4.5.2.2 Active
Select the Active check box to actively monitor the folder. Files in the folder will be sent and deleted
immediately.
13.4.5.2.3 Add e-mail addresses to the folder

Double-click the E-mail addresses field to add new addresses. In the Properties or Add windows
you can also right-click, and then select Add.
Click the Add to folder button to add the selected e-mail addresses to the folder.
13.4.5.2.4 Delete e-mail addresses from the folder

To delete e-mail addresses in the Properties or Add windows right-click, and then select Delete.
13.4.5.3 Add, change or delete e-mail addresses in the internal AutoMail

database
1KGD 400111 December 2006 263

PGIM 5
The E-mail addresses screen must be active when you delete, edit or add names and e-mail
addresses in the Internal AutoMail database.
You can open the E-mail addresses screen from the Properties or Add dialog boxes.
13.4.5.3.1 Delete e-mail addresses from the internal AutoMail database

Select the Delete command from the E-mail addresses screen to delete e-mail addresses from the
database.
13.4.5.3.2 Edit e-mail addresses in the internal AutoMail database

Select the Edit command from the E-mail addresses screen to display and change selected names
and the associated e-mail address.
13.4.5.3.3 Add e-mail addresses to the internal AutoMail database

Select the Add command from the E-mail addresses screen to add e-mail addresses and names to
the database. The name and e-mail address are saved in the database.
13.4.5.4 Set properties of folder

You can open the property sheet using three methods:
• Double-click a folder.
• Right-Click, and then select Properties.
• Select Properties from the File menu.
The functions of the property sheet are the same as already described above.
13.4.5.5 Quit AutoMail

Use the File\Terminate menu to quit the AutoMail program, or use the Close command.
You should set all folders to be inactive before you terminate AutoMail to ensure a reliable program
exit.
13.4.5.6 Remarks
Each file in the folder is sent separately. Files above 1.2 MB are not sent, but deleted.
13.4.6 Error analysis
13.4.6.1 Options
The options information must have the correct sender e-mail address and the correct mail server. If
errors occur when sending e-mails, check the settings in the Options menu.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 264

PGIM 5
13.4.6.2 Log file

The "Automail.log" log file shows the start and termination times of AutoMail, as well the files sent. The
log file is created in the "PlantConnect.SYS\Debug\AutoMail" folder.
13.5 System Diagnosis
13.5.1 General
The setup monitor called “System Diagnosis” provides a quick overview about the PGIM components
installed on the local PC, along with their operating state. It can also be used for trouble shooting, and
for the preparation of a report of the current state of the installation.
13.5.2 Icons
The following icons with the mentioned meaning are used inside the program “System Diagnosis”
Symbol of the root node
No problems, everything works fine
Not installed or not working optimal
A problem occurred
Information
Further action
Error
Item contains further information
13.5.3 Handling
A tree structure is used for displaying the information. The root of this tree structure is the local PC.
After the start of the program only the root and the main items are visible. The different symbols and
colors show the current operating state of the main items ScanManager, server and client. The last
main item in the tree structure is labeled "Setup Info".
Each main item contains further information (see chapter 3), that can be seen if the main item is
expanded (either by clicking on the "+" sign or by double-clicking the name of the main item).
Expanding any main item of the root node, as well as pressing the F5 button refreshes the displayed
information. During the time required for refreshing the information the cursor is shown as an hour
glass.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 265

PGIM 5
13.5.4 Main Items
13.5.4.1 ScanManager
The main item ScanManager contains the sub items "Installed", "License
OK", "Operating" and "ScanDriver OK" with the remark
"yes" or "no".
The item "License OK" contains the sub item "Analysis" where the
license file can be inspected, the ScanManager folder
can be opened and the network card can be analyzed.
The item "Operating" contains the sub item "Analysis" where the log
file can be inspected, and the Scanner folder can be
opened.
The item "ScanDriver OK" contains all ScanDrivers as sub items that can
be found either in
<system path>\PlantConnect.BIN\Scanner\Scandriver or in the license
file <system path>\PlantConnect.BIN\Cfg\lcfg.ini.
These items contain information on whether the
respective ScanDriver is included in the license. The
respective configuration folder can also be opened.
A fifth sub item which is always red indicates a severe error (for
example if the license file lcfg.ini cannot be found).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 266

PGIM 5
This item is only visible in the case of severe
errors.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 267

PGIM 5
13.5.4.2 Server
The main item Server contains the sub items "Installed", "License OK",
"Service started" and "Server operating" with the
remark "yes" or "no".
If the local server is running, the last item "Start webbrowser..."
allow you to create a connection to the server in an
internet browser.
Further information concerning the version, number of tags and the
number of licensed clients are displayed behind the
paper clip symbols if accessible. The large number of
clients showing the value "0" may indicate that the
TCP/IP server of the PGIM server is not running. The
TCP/IP server delivers the data for the clients.
The item "License OK" contains the sub item "Analysis" where the
license file can be inspected, and the network card
can be analyzed.
The item "Server operating" contains the sub item "Analysis" where the
initialization file "PlaCo.ini" can be inspected, and
the folder for the log files can be opened.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 268

PGIM 5
13.5.4.3 Client
The main item Client contains the sub items "Installed", "Client
operating" and "License server operating" with the
remark "yes" or "no".
Further information concerning the name and version of the license
server can be displayed behind the paper clip symbols
if accessible.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 269

PGIM 5
13.5.4.4 Info
The info items "System Applications", "Client Applications", "Event

Management" and "Setup Info" contain the sub items for
detailed information on the PGIM applications are
running on the local computer.
13.5.5 Create Report

Select Create Report from the Report menu o write all information in the tree structure as a report in
a text file.
You can add additional information to this file, such as the regional settings, entries in the file "Hosts",
versions of the Internet Explorer, the Windows operating system and MS-Office as well as the
complete Winmsd report ( as far as accessible).
If the Winmsd report cannot be created within a period of 30 seconds a respective hint appears in the
report file, and this report is not created.
The name of the report is created according the rule Dr.PlantCon_ddmmyy.txt (with dd = day of
month, mm = month, yy = year) and stored in the folder <Installation
path>\PlantConnect.SYS\Debug\Analysis.
Two additional files containing the complete content of the folder System32 (FilesSystem32.txt) and
PlantConnect.BIN (FilesPlaCoBin.txt) are also stored in this folder. The complete path to the report file
is shown at the end of the report.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 270

PGIM 5
The second menu entry "Open log folder" allows you to open the log folder of DrPlantConnect.
13.5.6 Restrictions with Windows 95/98

As it is not possible to run a PGIM server or ScanManager on Windows 95/98. These components are
not displayed within “System Diagnosis” (even not as gray symbols). In addition the creation of a
Winmsd-report is not possible on those operating systems, and therefore no such report can appear in
the report file.
13.5.7 Log file "DrPlantCon.log"

The log file named "DrPlantCon.log" of the program “System Diagnosis”
appears in the folder:
< Installation path > \PlantConnect.SYS \Debug\Dr_PlantCon
1KGD 400111 December 2006 271

PGIM 5
13.6 WatchDog
13.6.1 Introduction
The PGIM Watch-Dog (PlaCoWD) monitors the sections from the control system via the PGIM
Scandriver and the PGIM ScanManager up to the PGIM database. In the case of a failure or
regeneration of the connection, corresponding messages are issued in the control system and in
PGIM so that an operator in the control system or in PGIM can initiate appropriate measures to
remove the fault. This requires that the procedure described in the following chapter can be
implemented in the control system.
13.6.2 Procedure
13.6.2.1 Control System Setup

In the control system, a ramp (automatically and continuously increasing signal) is configured with a
limit value. This ramp is incremented, for example, every second by the value 1. If a configurable limit
value is exceeded, an incoming message will be issued in the control system (for example "+ PGIM
disturbed"). If the signal falls below the limit value, the corresponding outgoing message (for example
"- PGIM disturbed") will be issued. This ramp can be reset either by a binary pulse (Reset) or by
describing the ramp signal with the value 0. If the ramp is reset before reaching the limit value, no
message will be issued in the control system.
13.6.2.2 PGIM Setup

In PGIM, a PGIM WatchDog (PlaCoWD) application runs as a service under Windows, which can be
set via a configuration file. The PlaCoWD cyclically checks in the ScanManager and in the database to
determine whether the value of the ramp changes in the control system.
If the values change, the connection is OK, and PlaCoWD either writes a binary pulse for a
configurable duration or the value 0 on the ramp signal in the control system. In this way, the ramp in
the control system is reset, and the message will be suppressed. Writing can be performed via the
existing interface. You can also use another scanner to transmit the value, for example, via a direct
output card in the PC to the control system (The hardware extension is optionally available).
PlaCoWD also resets the ramp in the control system if the value of the ramp has exceeded an
adjustable maximum value. This is to avoid a situation where the ramp in the control system reaches a
limit where it will no longer change (for example 102.5%). This state may occur when the connection
to PGIM has been interrupted. Then the ramp in the control system exceeds the limit value initiating a
message up to the maximum value. The value remains at the maximum value until PlaCoWD resets
the value by comparing it with the adjusted maximum value.
If PlaCoWD detects that the value of the ramp does not change either in the ScanManager and/or in
the database, the ramp will not be reset in the control system, and the fault is automatically indicated
in the control system when exceeding the limit value of the ramp.
PlaCoWD additionally indicates failures in its LOG file, in the Windows event log and in the PGIM
alarm management. An error message in PGIM indicates whether there is a problem in the
ScanManager and/or the database. When PlaCoWD again recognizes a change of the ramp signal
1KGD 400111 December 2006 272

PGIM 5
(connection restored), PlaCoWD issues corresponding positive acknowledgments in the LOG file, in
the Windows event log, and also in the PGIM alarm management. It resets the value of the ramp in
the control system. The outputs of PlaCoWD are configurable (see Chapter 3.3).
The configuration file for the Watch-Dog application resides in the folder
...\PlantConnect.BIN\Tools\WatchDog\ . The name is "PlaCoDW.ini".
PlaCoWD requires the following information, which is stored in the configuration file:
[WatchDogSignal 1]
# Cycle time in seconds for checking the ramp
cycle = 10
# Deviation of the ramp value from the last value
deviation = 5.0
# Name of the ramp signal
input = \\SRV01\SM01\SD01\SignalName01
# Maximum value of the ramp
maxvalue = 9999
# Name of the reset signal
output = \SM01\SD02\SignalName02
[WatchDogSignal 2]
# Cycle time in seconds for checking the ramp
cycle = 20
# Deviation of the ramp value from the last value
deviation = 2.0
# Name of the ramp signal
input = \\SRV02\SM02\SD01\SignalName01
# Maximum value of the ramp
maxvalue = 105
# Name of the reset pulse
reset = \SM03\SD02\ResetSignalName01
# Duration of the reset pulse
resetduration = 2
Legend
[WatchDogSignal 1]
It is possible to configure an arbitrary number of signals for monitoring (WatchDogSignal 1 ...n) which
can be acquired from different control systems via different ScanDrivers and ScanManagers. All the
following parameters in the section refer to this area.
cycle (Default = 10)
The cycle time in seconds during which the signal to be monitored is checked for changes.
deviation (Default = 1.0)
The minimum deviation of the ramp signal value from the last cycle.
input
1KGD 400111 December 2006 273

PGIM 5
The name of the ramp signal indicated in the PGIM notation. By means of the syntax of the name,
PlaCoWD automatically recognizes the name in the ScanManager and in the server. It establishes the
appropriate connections. This signal is monitored for changes (complete PGIM name including server
and scanner name).
1KGD 400111 December 2006 274

PGIM 5
maxvalue
Maximum value of the ramp which is still monitored for changes. If the read value exceeds the
maximum value, PlaCoWD also writes on "output" or "reset" in order to achieve a defined state in the
control system.
output
The name of the signal in the control system indicated in the PGIM notation. The value 0 will be
written once to this control system. This writing causes a reset of the ramp signal to 0 in the control
system (PGIM name without server name, scanner name only so that the signal is written directly on
the ScanManager).
alternative for output
reset
The name of the signal in the control system indicated in the PGIM notation. A pulse (reset) will be
written to this control system. This writing causes a reset of the ramp signal to 0 in the control system.
In contrast to "output", "reset" is written on 1 for a specific time and then on 0 again.
resetduration (Default = 1)
The time in seconds during which the reset signal will show a value of 1 before being set back to 0.
13.6.4 PlaCoWD Dialog Box

You can specify where messages of the PGIM WatchDog will be stored (logged) and whether your
computer should beep. Double-click the Watchdog icon in the system tray to open the PlaCoWD
dialog box. There may be a delay in starting the dialog box in order not to disrupt the monitoring cycles
of PlaCoWD. The delay will be less than 3 seconds.
Messages in the log file

If messages will not be written to a log file, logging can be disabled here. The message file of PGIM
WatchDog is called PCWDmessage.txt. It is stored in the ....\PlantConnect.SYS\Events folder.
Messages in the NT event display

You can write the messages not only into the log file, but also into the NT event display with this
option.
Acoustic message
When this option is activated, an acoustic signal (beep) on the PC is initiated in the case when a
message is received.
Messages into the alarm management

If, in addition to the PGIM standard installation, the alarm management module is used, messages of
the PlaCoWD can also be generated and stored there. For that purpose, the IP name of the alarm
management server must be specified.
Click the Show messages button to display the log file in the standard Windows editor.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 275

PGIM 5
It is also possible to stop and then to continue the service with the PlaCoWD dialog box.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 276

PGIM 5
13.7 PlaCoArc (Symphony Maestro-UX)
13.7.1 Introduction
The ABB DCS Symphony Maestro-UX is able to perform a medium-term storage of process data (over
several days) and to make the data available for evaluation purposes.
The data extraction of archive data from Maestro-UX is performed via a TCP/IP protocol network
connection:
Usually data is extracted from Melody to the PGIM system continuously, and PGIM stores the process
data in long-term archives if required.
If the PGIM server or the associated PGIM scanner must be stopped, for example for maintenance
purposes, the process data for the period during which the data acquisition was not available is
missing in the PGIM archives.
The program PlaCoArc (or also PGIM/MaestroArchiv) is used to store process data from the Maestro
system immediately in the PGIM archives.
To ensure the overall function of the PlaCoArc program, software portions are required in Maestro-UX
as well as in PGIM with the corresponding configuration.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 277

PGIM 5
This configuration describes the portions on the PGIM side (either PGIM server or PGIM scanner) as
well as on the Maestro-UX side (HP workstation).
13.7.2 Installation on the Maestro-UX workstation

After the installation of the PGIM software, the necessary software package for the Maestro-UX
Workstation is available in the folder ...PlantConnect.bin\PlaCoArc. The installation can be done as in
the following example:
Example: Sending the Tar-Files from the PC to the Workstation:

==============================================================
E:\temp>dir PlaCo*
Data carrier in drive E: is Local Data
Data carrier number: EC1D-E909
Folder from E:\temp
30.08.01 10:41 327.680 PlaCo_Inst.tar

1 Datei(en) 327.680 Bytes
1.178.247.168 Bytes frei
E:\temp>ftp miw4
Connected to MIW4.
220 demo1 FTP server (Version 1.7.212.2 Tue Apr 21 12:14:46 GMT 1998) ready.
User (MIW4:(none)): pml
331 Password required for pml.
Password:
230 User pml logged in.
Ftp> pwd
257 "/usr/pml" is current folder.
Ftp> mkdir temp
257 MKD command successful.
Ftp> cd temp
250 CWD command successful.
Ftp> bin
200 Type set to I.
Ftp> put PlaCo_Inst.tar
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for PlaCo_Inst.tar.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 278

PGIM 5
226 Transfer complete.
327680 Bytes gesendet in 0,36 Sekunden (907,70 KB/s)
Ftp> quit
221 Goodbye.
E:\temp>
Example: Unpacking of Tar-Files in a temporary folder:

==================================================================
21 [pml] demo1:/usr/pml: cd temp
22 [pml] demo1:/usr/pml/temp: tar -xvf PlaCo_Inst.tar
x PlaCo_Mux.tar, 317440 bytes, 620 tape blocks
x placoinst.sh, 1356 bytes, 3 tape blocks
x remove.sh, 1077 bytes, 3 tape blocks
x services.template, 340 bytes, 1 tape blocks
23 [pml] demo1:/usr/pml/temp: ll
total 1270
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 327680 Aug 30 10:49 PlaCo_Inst.tar
-rw-r----- 1 pml pss 317440 Aug 29 18:19 PlaCo_Mux.tar
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 1356 Aug 30 10:33 placoinst.sh
-rwxr-xr-x 1 pml pss 1077 Aug 30 10:43 remove.sh
-rw-r--r-- 1 pml pss 340 Aug 30 10:19 services.template
24 [pml] demo1:/usr/pml/temp:
Example: Installation of PGIM-drivers to MUX :

=========================================================
71 [pml] demo1:/usr/pml/temp: placoinst.sh

Nun wird PlaCo_Mux vom folder /usr/pml/temp nach /usr/pml installiert....
x cso2condas/CSO2CONDAS_CSO_25.Log, 282 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x cso2condas/cso2condas, 49309 bytes, 97 tape blocks
x cso2condas/start, 383 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x eventsrv/exe/eventserver, 53392 bytes, 105 tape blocks
x netapi.002/OPL_APPL_TASK01.Normal, 7133 bytes, 14 tape blocks
x netapi.002/OPL_APPL_TASK01.lists, 1953 bytes, 4 tape blocks
x netapi.002/cso2condasstart_pex, 1424 bytes, 3 tape blocks
x netapi.002/event2condasstart_pex, 1424 bytes, 3 tape blocks
x netapi.002/exe/netapisrv, 127448 bytes, 249 tape blocks
1KGD 400111 December 2006 279

PGIM 5
x netapi.002/exe/NETAPISRV.LOG_CSO_01, 116 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/netapistart, 1124 bytes, 3 tape blocks
x netapi.002/netapistart.t, 1140 bytes, 3 tape blocks
x netapi.002/netapistart_pex, 1022 bytes, 2 tape blocks
x netapi.002/netapistop, 726 bytes, 2 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSOE_FLAG_ANA, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEANA, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANA_4L, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANA_8L, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEANA1, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSO_FLAG_ANA, 124 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEREAL, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/DEFAULT, 81 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_BINUEB, 183 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN3, 209 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSO_FLAG_BIN, 227 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANA, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANA1, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANA2, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_MERKBIN, 227 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_REGLER, 237 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_ANAUEB, 237 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_MERKANA, 221 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEANA_X1, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEANA_I1, 220 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANMON, 115 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCBIN3, 217 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/SSO_Station_LOS, 159 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCCLC, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCCLCD, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN13, 233 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCAPID, 123 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCAPID_XAY, 123 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEIDF_ISTA1, 262 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN13_XG54, 233 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEANA_XB02, 220 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN3_I1, 212 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN3_I2, 212 bytes, 1 tape blocks
1KGD 400111 December 2006 280

PGIM 5
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN3_XB01, 212 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CEBIN3_XB02, 212 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANOUT, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCANOUT_Y, 115 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCAPID_WSTA, 239 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCAPID_YAY, 123 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCAPID_YSTA, 239 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCBFLAG_B, 217 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCBFLAG_I, 123 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCBFLAG_I_YI1, 123 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCBFLAG_R, 119 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCBIN3_I1, 217 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCIDF, 217 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_CSCIDF_I1, 217 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_REGLER_VYA, 237 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/sellist/_ZAEUEB, 83 bytes, 1 tape blocks
x netapi.002/t, 81 bytes, 1 tape blocks
Now it is necessary to install the software package PML_BASE !
Example: Uninstall of PGIM-drivers at MUX :

============================================================
72 [pml] demo1:/usr/pml/temp: remove.sh

Now the PlaCo_Mux out of the folder /usr/pml will be uninstalled....
13.7.2.1 Detailed description of software installation
13.7.2.1.1 Customize the "/etc/services" file on the Maestro-UX WS

For the installation on the Maestro-UX workstation, first a free service number must be obtained and
entered from a superuser account into the Services file "/etc/services". This service number refers to
the TCP/IP protocol and must correspond to the configured service number on the PlaCoArc side.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 281

PGIM 5
At present, the numbers used in the following examples are taken as default values in most of the
plants, however, it is quite possible to use any free service number. You should try to use the common
standard whenever possible.
The table below shows a sample session for the modification of the file "/etc/services":
34 [pml] lin02:/users/pml: cd /etc Set current folder to "/etc".

35 [pml] lin02:/etc: su Switch to SuperUser "root", possibly
with password inquiry.
# pwd For checking: PrintWorkingFolder
/etc Output: "/etc" is set, therefore okay.
# vi services Call up Unix-Editor "vi" to edit the
"services" file.
::: Check whether the service numbers

5001-5025 are already used.
Iasqlsvr 7489/tcp # Information Access
If not, find an appropriate place for the
input, for example before the
"Kerberos-Block".
#
#
klogin 543/tcp # Kerberos rlogin –kfall
:::
::: Comments begin with the ‘#’ character.
Including information on the purpose
Iasqlsvr 7489/tcp # Information Access
and origin of these modifications can
recserv 7815/tcp # SharedX Receiver Service help users in the future.
CSO_25 has been entered.
#
# The following service is required for PGIM ! Note: In the editor vi, the command
":wq!" is entered to save a read-only
# H&B 14.1.1999
file.
#
Before saving, however, you must
check for write errors.
CSO_25 5025/tcp
#
#
klogin 543/tcp # Kerberos rlogin –kfall
:::
1KGD 400111 December 2006 282

PGIM 5
In this example, the service CSO_25 has been defined with the service no. 5025 and the protocol
TCP/IP.
13.7.2.1.2 Installation of the "Mux2PlaCo" software on the Maestro-UX WS

The name of this software has been derived from the term "Maestro-UX to PGIM".
For the installation of the software Mux2PlaCo, it is recommended to create a folder or a symbolic link
"/NETAPI" and "/MUX2PLACO" as a superuser account and, if necessary, to set the owner of the
folder and of all the files included to "PML" (for example with the command "cd /NETAPI; chown pml
*").
An example of such an installation : Comments :
30 [pml] lin02:/users/pml: cd / Set current folder to "/".

31 [pml] lin02:/: su Switch to SuperUser "root", possibly with
password inquiry.
# pwd For checking: PrintWorkingFolder
/ Output: "/" is set, therefore okay.
# ln -s /users/pml/netapi /NETAPI Set a symbolic link "/NETAPI" to the
folder "/users/pml/netapi".
# ln -s /users/pml/mux2placo /MUX2PLACO And set a symbolic link "/MUX2PLACO"
to the folder "/users/pml/mux2placo".
# exit And exit the "root" shell, return to the PML
user.
32 [pml] lin02:/: cd /NETAPI Checking the just created link "/NETAPI"
33 [pml] lin02:/users/pml/netapi: cd /MUX2PLACO Okay, the folder change has been
executed without error message.
Now checking the just created link
"/MUX2PLACO".
34 [pml] lin02:/users/pml/mux2placo: Okay, this folder change, too, has been
executed without error message.
13.7.2.1.3 Copy "OPL_APPL_TASK*" for integration into the APIM process

Here is a short example of the installation of the "OPL files"; Refer to the Maestro-UX and also to the
"NetApiSrv" configuration for detailed information.
If the specifications and folders used in the previously described steps have been retained, then the
sample "OPL files" of the installation can be used without modification. If, however, other folder names
or links have been selected, the corresponding places in the OPL files must be customized.
38 [pml] lin02:/users/pml/netapi: ll /NETAPI/OPL* Lists all OPL files in "/NETAPI",

i.e. in the folder
"/users/pml/netapi"
Output: 2 files exist in the
installation folder, okay.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 283

PGIM 5
39 [pml] lin02:/users/pml/netapi: cd /usr/contronic/config Set current folder to
"/usr/contronic/config".
40 [pml] lin02:/usr/contronic/config: ll OPL* Display the OPL files that exist in
-rw-rw-r 1 pj72 pss 5675 Jun 5 1997 OPL_DSPL_TASK00.Normal
-rw-rw-r 1 pj72 pss 1908 May 6 1996 OPL_DSPL_TASK00.lists
41 [pml] lin02:/usr/contronic/config: cp /NETAPI/OPL* ./ Copy the new OPL files from
"/NETAPI" to the folder
42 [pml] lin02:/usr/contronic/config: ll OPL* Lists all OPL files in
-rw-r-----1 pml pss 7133 Jan 14 14:09 OPL_APPL_TASK01.Normal
Output: 4 files exist now in the
-rw-r-----1 pml pss 1953 Jan 14 14:09 OPL_APPL_TASK01.lists
installation folder, okay.
-rw-rw-r-1 pj72 pss 5675 Jun 5 1997 OPL_DSPL_TASK00.Normal
Note: In order to be able to
-rw-rw-r-1 pj72 pss 1908 May 6 1996 OPL_DSPL_TASK00.lists execute the commands
"Terminate APIM TA01" and
"Start APIM TA01", an arbitrary
software package (for example
PML_Base) must be installed.
Only after this step is complete
will the NETAPISRV be started
and stopped in a controlled
way by Maestro !
13.7.2.1.4 Customize the "/NETAPI/netapistart"

The fourth and last step to be done on the Maestro-UX workstation is to integrate the start of the
Mux2PlaCo process in the "netapistart" file. The fundamental structure of this file is included in the
description for the NetApiSrv; therefore, only those sections which must be changed will be mentioned
here.
The mechanisms for including the netapistart file into the Maestro-UX program management is also
described in the configuration of the NetApiSrv.
In addition to the lines that already exist, a few lines for the Mux2PlaCo process must be inserted.
These lines should be inserted at the end of the existing file, but should be placed before the "endless
loop" which starts with the comment "Maestro-UX-Exit-Procedure".
Extract of a "netapistart" before the installation of Mux2PlaCo :
#!/bin/ksh
# Shellscript to be used to start and stop "netapisrv"-processes
# under the control of CS-O. From a terminal window use the
# standart CS-O commands "Start" and "Terminate" for example
# Start APIM TA01
# Terminate APIM TA01
#
cd /NETAPI/exe
::
1KGD 400111 December 2006 284

PGIM 5
::etc.....
::
#export PML_TRACE=OPL,FSV
#export PML_LOGFILE=/NETAPI/pml_5.log
export PML_PORT_NAME=APIM/J05B
./netapisrv -c 5 -d 00 -s CSO_05 &
export PML_TRACE=
export PML_LOGFILE=
# Maestro-UX-Exit procedure
trap '/NETAPI/netapistop ; exit' 15
while true
do
sleep 10
done
exit 0
#
Extract of a "netapistart" after the installation of Mux2PlaCo:
#!/bin/ksh
# Shellscript to be used to start and stop "netapisrv"-processes
# under the control of CS-O. From a terminal window use the
# standart CS-O commands "Start" and "Terminate" for example
# Start APIM TA01
# Terminate APIM TA01
#
cd /NETAPI/exe
::
::etc.....
::
#export PML_TRACE=OPL,FSV
#export PML_LOGFILE=/NETAPI/pml_5.log
export PML_TRACE=
export PML_LOGFILE=
1KGD 400111 December 2006 285

PGIM 5
# Starting the MUX2PLACO process....
# export PML_LOGFILE=/MUX2PLACO/pml_25.log
# export PML_TRACE=OPL,FSV
/MUX2PLACO/mux2placo -s CSO_25 -t 30 &
# Maestro-UX-Exit procedure
trap '/NETAPI/netapistop ; exit' 15
while true
do
sleep 10
done
exit 0
#
The above example shows that "mux2placo" is started according to the same principle as the
NetApiSrv.
The parameter "-s CSO_25" transfers the service to be used on the Maestro-UX workstation (see
3.1.1), the 2nd parameter "-t 30" sets the timeout period of 30 seconds. This timeout period refers to
the waiting time for archive inquiries, and should not be changed by the user. In the case of archives
being distributed to several Maestro-UX workstations, the response time on archive inquiries may take
a few seconds.
13.7.3 Installation of the PlaCoArc on the PGIM PC

During the PGIM installation the PlaCoArc software is automatically integrated in the PGIM folder tree,
for example in the subfolder" C:\PLANTCONNECT.BIN\PlaCoArc".
In order to avoid overwriting configuration files that may already exist, a sample file with the name
"Confi_PlaCoArc.txt" is also installed. For an individual customization, or for a new configuration file,
this sample file should be taken as a template and copied completely or partly to a file with a new
name.
Customizations must be performed either in the standard configuration file PlaCoArc.CFG or in a
configuration text file named differently (the name of which must be transferred as a parameter to
PlaCoArc) (see the PlaCoArc.CFG configuration file).
Note that the names of the Maestro-UX workstation, which are used in the PlaCoArc.CFG file, have
also been entered as valid host names in the "Hosts" file under Windows. (The name of this file
depends on the Windows system path, for example "C:\.WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS\ETC\HOSTS".)
1KGD 400111 December 2006 286

PGIM 5
13.8 Auto RAS Dialer
13.8.1 Introduction
Decentralized plants are supervised from central control posts. Data from these plants become more
important in large interlaced systems. Timely control of the data in a central system is the basis for
evaluation, logging, analysis and optimization.
Decentralized plants are queried cyclically by the PGIM server over voice-grade channels.
13.8.2 Conditions
A telephone connection for each plant location.
PGIM ScanManager computer with an appropriate ScanDriver for the existing data acquisition.
A modem for each location.
PGIM server with modem and an Auto RAS Dialer software license.
13.8.3 Installation
The Auto RAS Dialer is installed on the PGIM server computer. The PGIM installation copies the
program to the ...PlantConnect.bin\AutoRasDialer\ folder. The program is added to the AutoStart
group of the computer. The application is started with the computer. The telecommunications
connections are furnished with the telecommunications monitor by Windows. You can also examine
whether you can make a connection to the desired location.
The AutoRasDialer can be configured by the Auto-Dial-Configurator.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 287

PGIM 5
In a table the goals are configured.

New entry:
The first selection button creates a new entry.
Safe:
The second selection button stores to the configuration.
Attributes:
After selecting a line, use the third selection button to open a window to change attributes.
o Communications selection:
Select from the configured list of telecommunications providers.
o Active:
Each configured entry can be deactivated.
o Entry alias:
A detailed name can be registered for the connection.
o Start:
Indication of the first point of starting time. This indication is basis for the cycles configured.
o Option:
Daily(1x) A connection is opened once daily.
Cyclically all x minutes A connection is opened in the cycle of the adjusted
minutes.
Connect time: After the adjusted minutes the switched line is closed.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 288

PGIM 5
Delete:
The selected line can be deleted with this button. A safety inquiry protects against inadvertent
deletion.
Terminate:
Click the Terminate button to close the configuration screen.
13.8.5 Operation
After the start of the Auto-RAS-Dialer this screen appears.
A display similar to a traffic light shows the current condition of the program:
Green lamp: Program is started. No connection actively.
Yellow lamp flashing: Connection actively to the goal indicated on the top right
Red lamp: Connection failed.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 289

PGIM 5
A connection can be made or terminated manually:
Connect manually for the provider displayed on the top right.
Disconnect connection manually the provider displayed on the top right.
A list is displayed of all available telecommunications connections. A status line with current
information displays in the lower portion of the scene.
During the establishment of a connection the telecommunications connecting manager screen
appears.
1KGD 400111 December 2006 290

PGIM 5
1KGD 400111 December 2006 291

PGIM Setup Admin

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

PGIM Setup Admin

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Power Generation Information Manager

Copyright ©2000-2006 ABB AG. All rights reserved.

Document: 1KGD 400111

1.6 Status Information....................................................................................................................................38

1.7 Time Zones................................................................................................................................................39

1.9 Range (double, float)................................................................................................................................44

1.10 Maintenance Interval ................................................................................................................................44

2.2 ScanManager ............................................................................................................................................48

1KGD 400111 December 2006 v

1KGD 400111 December 2006 vi

3.1 OPC DA Server on Scan Manager (legacy)..........................................................................................166

3.3 Functionality ...........................................................................................................................................172

3.4 Quality Mapping......................................................................................................................................172

3.5 Implemented Interfaces .........................................................................................................................173

3.6 PGIM OPC DA Server Performance Test..............................................................................................176

3.7 OPC HDA Compliance Key ....................................................................................................................176

4 Database / Server ...................................................................................................................177

4.2 Start / Stop...............................................................................................................................................178

1KGD 400111 December 2006 vii

5.2 Installation of the Add-In .......................................................................................................................211

5.3 The folder structure / Files ....................................................................................................................212

5.4 Entries in the Ini-File ..............................................................................................................................213

6.1 Signal Colors...........................................................................................................................................214

6.2 Optional Columns in the Legend ..........................................................................................................214

6.3 Context Menu ..........................................................................................................................................215

7.1 Installation and Configuration...............................................................................................................218

7.2 Manage AutoMail Tasks.........................................................................................................................219

7.3 Task Configuration.................................................................................................................................220

1KGD 400111 December 2006 viii

8.2 Function of WebClients .........................................................................................................................224

8.3 Configuration of WebClient ...................................................................................................................225

8.4 PGIM Server in the Internet ...................................................................................................................226

9.6 PGIM Client..............................................................................................................................................231

9.7 Event Management .................................................................................................................................231

11.3 Installation of AutoUpdate.....................................................................................................................237

1KGD 400111 December 2006 ix

11.5 AutoUpdate on PGIM Clients.................................................................................................................241

11.6 Files in the Update Folder of the File Server .......................................................................................242

11.7 Sample Installations...............................................................................................................................243

12.1 Configuration of a scheduler item ........................................................................................................248

12.2 Configuration of additional jobs ...........................................................................................................252

12.3 Options ....................................................................................................................................................253

13 Additional Programs ..............................................................................................................254

1KGD 400111 December 2006 x

1KGD 400111 December 2006 xi

Alarm and event Trends and +

Logs and Performance

Figure 1: Functional scope of PGIM

1KGD 400111 December 2006 12

Figure 2: Overview of the PGIM system structure (example)

1.1.1 Process data acquisition (scanner)

1KGD 400111 December 2006 13

1.1.2 Process Data Management (Server)

1KGD 400111 December 2006 14

1.1.3 Process Data Evaluation (Clients)

1.1.3.3 Trend Analysis

1KGD 400111 December 2006 15

1.1.3.4 Process graphic

1.1.3.6 Technical calculations

1.1.3.7 Security Concept

1KGD 400111 December 2006 16

1KGD 400111 December 2006 17

1.2 Setup instruction

1.2.1 PGIM Installation Kit

The PGIM Welcome window of the installation program opens.

Choose “Install PGIM Server and Client 5.0”.

FILETIME FTLocal2FTGmt (FILETIME MyDate, short BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)

double UnxGmt2UnxLocal(double MyDate, short BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)

double DATEGmt2DATELocal(double MyDate, short BiasFlag, short *ReturnCode)